Stability Criteria (CR)

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.
1
Stability Criteria (CR)
1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.
NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)
Table of Contents
1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 Scope of the subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 Stability criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 Calculation and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.1 Intact stability criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Calculation methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Checking of loading conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 GM and KG limit curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4 Minimum GM and maximum KG values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.1 Limit curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.2 Criterion table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.3 Loading condition table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.4 Min. GM and max. KG table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.5 Summary lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.6 Loading condition check plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.7 Minimum GM check plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.8 Openings, freeboard, margin line and special points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Damage stability criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Calculation methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Checking of damage cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 GM and KG limit curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.1 Limit curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.2 Criterion table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.3 Loading condition table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.4 Min. GM and max. KG table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.5 Summary lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.6 Criterion check plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.7 Minimum GM check plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.8 Openings, freeboard, margin line and special points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8
5 Data concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 Stability criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criterion group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heeling moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freeboard deck edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bilge line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9
6 Connections to other subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 9 Definition functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

9.1 Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
9.1.1 Maximum righting lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.2 Maximum heeling angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.2.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3 Minimum area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.4 Minimum GM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.4.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.5 Position of maximum GZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.5.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.6 Angle of downflooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.6.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.7 Range of stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.7.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.8 Angle of vanishing stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.8.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.9 Reserve to downflooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.9.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.10 Reserve to immersion of freeboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.10.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.11 Area ratio in wind and rolling condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.11.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.12 Area ratio in wind condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.12.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.13 Reserve dynamic stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.13.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.14 Dynamic stability arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.14.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.15 GZ/MOM ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.15.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.16 Reserve to immersion of margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.17 MINGZ - Minimum reserve to C*Sin(heel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.18 Crane criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.18.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Using of macros in criteria calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Criterion group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Heeling moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1 Moments independent of loading conditions and damage cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1.1 Constant moment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1.2 Shape cosine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1.3 Shape cosine to the power of two. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1.4 Polygon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1.5 Smooth curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1.6 Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1.7 Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2 Moments dependent on loading conditions and damage cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.1 Wind moment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.2 Wind moment by IMO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.3 Wind moment by USSR Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.4 Wind moment for MODUs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.5 Turning moment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.6 Turning moment by IMO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.7 Turning moment by USSR Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.8 Passenger moment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2.9 Moment by load shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 15 16 18 18 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 28 31 32 32 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 37 38 38
9.4.2.10 Moment by grain shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.3 Combined moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 Freeboard deck edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 Bilge line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8 Special point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9 Margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39 39 39 40 40 40 41
10 Output functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
10.1 Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 GM and KG limit curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 Criterion table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.3 Loading condition table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.4 Minimum GM and maximum KG table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.5 Summary list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.6 GZ Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.7 Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.8 Freeboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.9 Margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.10 Special points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.11 Lateral profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.12 Auxiliary listing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Plotting according to macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 Minimum GM and maximum KG limit curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.3 Loading condition check plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.4 Criterion check plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.5 Minimum GM check plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.6 Profile check plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 Forced calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Assigning variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.1 Variables related to output lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.2 Variables related to hydrostatics and stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.3 Variables related to intermediate results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 47 47 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 57 58 59 60 61 61 61 64 65 68 69 69 70 70 75 77
11 Administrative functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 12 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

12.1 IMO Resolution A.749(ES.IV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.1 5.1. (a) Area under the GZ curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.2 5.1 (b) Righting lever GZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.3 5.1 (c) Position of the maximum righting arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.4 5.1 (d) Metacentric height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.5 5.2 (a) Crowding of passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.6 5.2 (b) Turning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 IMO Resolution A.562(14) (weather criterion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 IMO Resolution A.649(16) (1989 MODU CODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 USSR Register of Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.1 2.1 Weather criterion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.2 2.2 Curve of statical stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.3 3.1 Passenger ships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 US Coast Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.1 Weather criterion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Norwegian Maritime Directorate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 84
12.6.1 Mobile offshore units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 12.7 See-Berufsgenossenschaft (SBG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 12.8 US Navy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
13 CR Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 Commands for definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Arguments - intact criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 List output - intact criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Graphic output - intact criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Auxiliary functions - intact criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Arguments - damage criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 List output - damage criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Graphic output - damage criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Auxiliary functions - damage criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
14 CR Service Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 15 Dredger Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

15.1 Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Purpose definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 Intact stability calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Intact stability criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.1 The criteria according to 6.1.3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.2 The weather criterion according to 6.1.4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.3 The criteria according to 6.1.2.2 c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 Variable displacement method and permeabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6 Damage stability calculations (Reg. 25-1 amended and modified by DR67: 6.2.1, 6.2.2 and 6.2.3). . . . . . . 15.7 The load lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 143 144 144 144 145 145 146 146 146
16 Offshore Structures Stability (OSS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

16.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.1 Reference system parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2 Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.1 The Calculation Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.2 Calculation Sections and Shell Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.3 The Compartment Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.4 The Wind Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2.5 Using general geometric transformations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3 Creating the Wind Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.1 Geometric Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.2 Wind Model Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4 Calculation Procedure - Intact Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.1 Loading Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.2 Wind Moment Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.2.1 Wind Moment from Wind Tunnel Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.3 Relevant Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.4 Azimuth angle for stability axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.5 Wind Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.6 Local Loading Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4.7 Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 Calculation Procedure - Damage Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5.1 Damage Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5.2 Wind Moment Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5.3 Relevant Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5.4 Wind Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 150 150 151 151 152 152 153 154 154 159 161 161 162 163 163 163 163 163 163 164 164 164 164 165
16.5.5 Local Initial Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5.6 Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 Calculation Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6.1 Wind Model and Area Exposed to Wind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6.1.1 Detailed Wind Moment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6.2 Moments and Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6.3 Criteria Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6.4 Assigning Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165 166 166 166 167 168 168 168
17 DNV Verified Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1 (169)
1 Purpose
The stability criteria subsystem CR covers the functions related to handling of intact stability criteria and damage stability criteria. The purpose of the subsystem is to:
s
s s
calculate the minimum GM and the maximum KG as a function of draught and trim, which assures compliance with the relevant intact stability criteria calculate for a selected set of damage cases the minimum GM and the maximum KG as a function of draught and trim, which assures compliance with the relevant damage stability criteria check whether the loading conditions meet the requirements of the relevant intact stability criteria check whether the damage cases meet the requirements of the relevant damage stability criteria.
The main functions of the subsystem are

s s s
s s s
definition of intact and damage stability criteria definition of data related to the stability criteria, for example, heeling moments calculation of the minimum GM and maximum KG limit curves as a function of draught or trim and relevant intact criteria calculation of the minimum GM and maximum KG limit curves for a set of damage cases as a function of draught or trim and relevant damage criteria testing of compliance of the loading conditions with the relevant intact criteria testing of compliance of the damage cases with the relevant damage criteria output of results as alphanumeric and graphic representation.
All these functions are installed in the task CR. The functions related to the intact stability criteria are performed in the environment INTACT (prompt CR_I.) and the functions related to the damage stability criteria are performed in the environment DAMAGE (prompt CR_D.). If CR is entered from the loading condition subsystem LD, the environment INTACT is assigned and if CR is entered from the damage stability subsystem DA, the environment DAMAGE is assigned. Entering CR from the TASK-level assigns the environment INTACT but the environment may be changed to DAMAGE and back to INTACT by the command ENV. The environments are so separate that the arguments assigned in one environment are not changing arguments in the other environment and the intact stability criteria and damage stability criteria are independent in the different environments. All the criterion types and the properties of the criteria are available in both environments. See also NAPA User Meeting workshop papers about stability criteria.
2 Scope of the subsystem

Most intact and damage stability criteria published by the classification societies and authorities are covered by the subsystem. For example, the following regulations, and regulations equivalent to these, can be handled:
s s s s s s s s s
SOLAS 90 IMO Resolution A.749(ES.IV) IMO weather criterion, Resolution A.562(14) IMO MODU CODE, Resolution A.649(16) MARPOL IBC Code (Resolution MSC.4(48)) IGC Code (Resolution MSC.6(48)) SOLAS 1974, Carriage of Grain US Coast Guard, October 1, 1990 (partly)
2 (169)
s s s s s s s s s
US Navy Rules of the USSR Register of Shipping, 1990 (partly) Norwegian Maritime Directorate, Regulations for Mobile Offshore Units,1991 Norwegian Petroleum Directorate, 1990 Det Norske Veritas Department of Energy (Brit.), Offshore Installations The Merchant Shipping Regulations (Brit.), 1984 SBG (German), 1984 Rahola.
Because all the central aspects of the criteria are given as parameters, the criteria equivalent to those appearing in the above regulations, i.e. the criteria which differ from the criteria of the above regulations only in respect of some parameter(s) (e.g. a different height, range, area, area ratio etc.), may be easily defined. There is also a wide range of possibilities to define own criteria only by changing parameters and combining criteria in different ways.
3 Stability criteria
A stability criterion is a rule defining the minimum or maximum accepted value for one property (quantity) calculated from the righting lever curve, e.g. the maximum height of the GZ curve within some interval range. A criterion is an intact stability criterion, if it is defined in the environment INTACT and the source of the GZ curve is intact stability. A criterion is a damage stability criterion, if it is defined in the environment DAMAGE and the source of the GZ curve is damage stability. The following criteria, or equivalent quantities, may be calculated:
s
s s
s s s s
s s
Maximum height of the GZ curve. The minimum accepted value for the maximum of the curve may be a constant value or it may depend on other properties of the GZ curve by an equation. The calculation of height may also be limited to some range of heeling angles or to a given position. If there is a moment connected to the criterion, maximum height means the maximum residual lever. Steady equilibrium heeling angle due to a heeling moment. The maximum heeling angle may be a constant value or it may depend on some properties of the loading condition or damage case, e.g. angle of downflooding. Area under the GZ curve. The minimum accepted area may be a constant value or it may depend on other properties of the GZ curve by an equation. Calculation of the area may be limited to a range of heeling angles. If there is a moment connected to the criterion, area means the area between the GZ curve and the moment arm curve. Height of metacenter (GM). The minimum height may be a constant value or it may depend on some properties of the ship and loading condition or damage case. Position of the maximum of the GZ curve. If there is a moment connected to the criterion, position of the maximum means the position of the maximum residual lever. Angle of downflooding. Range of positive stability. If there is a moment connected to the criterion, range is calculated from the first intercept to the second intercept of the GZ curve and the moment arm curve. Angle of vanishing stability. If there is a moment connected to the criterion, angle of vanishing stability means the angle of the second intercept of the GZ curve and the moment arm curve. Reserve to downflooding. The reserve is calculated from the angle of steady equilibrium. Reserve to immersion of the freeboard. The reserve is calculated from the angle of steady equilibrium. Reserve to immersion of the margin line. The reserve is calculated from the angle of steady equilibrium. Ratio between the area under the GZ curve and the area under the moment arm curve. Calculation of the areas may be limited to different ranges of the heeling angles. Ratio between the height of the GZ curve and the height of the moment curve. Height of the dynamic stability curve at a given angle.
The minimum and maximum accepted values of the quantities defined by the criteria are called requirements of the criteria. A requirement is a constant value valid for all loading conditions or damage cases or it may depend on the loading
3 (169)
condition or damage case or properties of the GZ curve. Often the actual value of the requirement is not known before the criterion is applied to the loading condition or damage case. The property (quantity) corresponding to the requirement and calculated from the actual GZ curve of the loading condition or damage case is called an attained value of the loading condition or damage case. Comparison of the attained value with the requirement defines the status of the loading condition or damage case with respect to the criterion. The status indicates whether the loading condition or damage case meets the requirement or not. The GM value, by which the loading condition or damage case meets the requirement and where any lesser value of GM the requirement is no more met, is called the minimum GM which is in compliance with the criterion. The KG value, by which the loading condition or damage case meets the requirement and where any greater value of KG the requirement is no more met, is called the maximum KG which is in compliance with the criterion. There is one to one correspondence between the minimum GM and maximum KG values by the formula KM = KG + GM. For intact stability criteria, the requirements, attained values, status indicators, minimum GM values and maximum KG values are stored as standard quantities in the run time memory of the subsystem. For damage stability criteria, the requirements, attained values, status indicators, minimum GM values and maximum KG values are stored as standard quantities in the secondary database (unit 4). For the detailed list of the quantities, see the CR.2 part of these documents. The criteria are identified by names. One may study several criteria of the same type at the same time. The relevant criteria are chosen by referring to their names. There is no restrictions on number or types of criteria which may be relevant simultaneously. A group of criteria is a named set of criteria which may be handled together. It is practical to collect criteria which belong to the same regulation or rule to the same group. The criteria may refer to heeling moments provided it has some sense. For example, the angle of downflooding has nothing to do with moments. The set of relevant criteria must be defined and selected by the user according to the regulations and authority.
4 Calculation and output

4.1 Intact stability criteria
There may be one or several loading conditions under investigation at the same time. A loading condition is either a condition defined in the loading condition subsystem LD or a condition defined by the floating position of the ship (draught, trim, GM). The latter loading conditions are often called local loading conditions because their GZ curves and other stability data are calculated locally in CR using its arguments and calculation modes. The GM (KG) limit curves are calculated for a set of local loading conditions (variable draught, constant trim or alternatively variable trim, constant draught) and the compliance check is usually done for the loading conditions of LD. 4.1.1 Calculation methods The GZ curve is taken as such from the loading condition of LD or the curve is calculated for the local loading condition for the hull, draught and trim as arguments (initial heeling angle is assumed to be zero). In the previous case, the effect of the free liquid surfaces is included in the GZ curve and taken into account as it was specified in LD. In the latter case, the effect of the free liquid surfaces is not taken into account. Calculation of the GZ curves for the local loading conditions may be carried out by the free trim method or by the fixed trim method. The calculation methods or arguments of the loading conditions fetched from LD are not possible to change in CR. The calculation of criteria may be carried out in the presence of heeling moments or without any heeling moment. The moments are linked to the criteria.
4 (169)
The minimum GM (maximum KG) which assures compliance with the criteria is calculated from the GZ curve by an iterative method varying GM in the equation GZ = MS + GM*sin(heel). Iteration is terminated when any lesser value of GM (greater value of KG) within the given tolerance does not any more satisfy the requirement. The minimum GM (maximum KG) may be calculated for a local loading condition or for a loading condition of LD. In the latter case, during iteration all other aspects of the loading condition but GM (KG) are assumed to be unchanged. The maximum KG values are always calculated by help of the minimum GM values; first the program calculates the minimum GM and then applies the equation MAXKG = KM - MINGM. 4.1.2 Checking of loading conditions Checking of the loading condition means that the program examines whether the loading condition is in compliance with the relevant criteria or not. The loading condition is checked by calculating the quantities defined by the criteria and comparing them with the requirements. The loading condition is in compliance with the criteria if all the relevant criteria are met simultaneously . Both kinds of loading conditions may be checked: loading conditions of LD and local loading conditions. All calculated quantities (requirements and attained values) are stored in a run time data description. 4.1.3 GM and KG limit curves The minimum GM (maximum KG) limit curve is the minimum GM (maximum KG) which is in compliance with the relevant criteria as a function of draught or trim. The limit curve is formed by calculating the individual limit curves for all relevant criteria and combining the curves to one overall maximum or minimum curve ensuring that the intersection points between the individual curves are properly taken into account. Only local loading conditions are used for limit curve calculation. The local loading conditions define the argument draughts or trims for the curve and the corresponding minimum GM or maximum KG values are calculated by the iterative method described above. The GM (KG) limit curves can be permanently stored in the data base to be used in other subsystems. The previous chapter presented how to check loading conditions. Another way to check whether the loading condition meets the requirements of the relevant criteria, is to compare the corrected GM (KG) of the loading condition with the corresponding GM (KG) value of the limit curve. Because the GM (KG) limit curve is calculated without any effect of free liquid surfaces and (usually) the loading condition contains free surfaces taken into account by various rules, this comparison is not always exact; there is some inaccuracy area on both sides of the limit curve. It may happen that the GM of the loading condition is below the limit curve but comparison of requirements and attained values results status OK. If there is any doubt about reliability of the limit curve check, use status check. The status check is always reliable. 4.1.4 Minimum GM and maximum KG values In addition to the minimum GM and maximum KG limit curves, there is also a possibility to calculate minimum GM and maximum KG values for loading conditions of LD. These data are stored in a run time data description. 4.1.5 Output All calculated quantities are stored in a run time description for making it possible for the user to make lists by the help of the standard table output and diagram output functions of NAPA. The subsystem produces also a set of standard lists and plots: 4.1.5.1 Limit curve The overall minimum GM (maximum KG) limit curve as a function of draught or trim and relevant criteria may be plotted or printed. In addition to the overall minimum (maximum), the minimum GM (maximum KG) limit curves of all individual criteria may be added to the plot. If desired, a selected set of loading conditions can be marked in the plot.
5 (169)
4.1.5.2 Criterion table A criterion table shows, for a single loading condition, all the relevant criteria and their requirements, the corresponding values attained by the loading condition and a status indicator showing whether the criterion is met or not. One listing command produces as many tables as there are selected loading conditions. 4.1.5.3 Loading condition table A loading condition table shows the names of the loading conditions, the determining criteria and their requirements, the corresponding values attained by the loading conditions and a status indicator showing whether the criterion is met or not. 4.1.5.4 Min. GM and max. KG table The min. GM and max. KG table shows, for all selected loading conditions, the minimum GM and maximum KG values which are in compliance with the relevant criteria. 4.1.5.5 Summary lists The summary lists offer a quick look at the central results of CR: minimum GM, maximum KG and status. The summary lists are two dimensional tables showing the selected quantities as function of loading condition and criterion, draught and criterion, trim and criterion or draught and trim. 4.1.5.6 Loading condition check plot For every loading condition, one can plot, the GZ curve of the loading condition combined with a drawing which shows the properties required by the criteria. One plotting command produces as many plots as there are selected loading conditions. 4.1.5.7 Minimum GM check plot This plot is similar to the loading condition check plot, but it is based on the GZ curve which is drawn for the minimum GM which is in compliance with the relevant criteria. 4.1.5.8 Openings, freeboard, margin line and special points These tables show how the relevant openings, the freeboard deck edge, the margin line and the special points are situated relative to the waterline in different loading conditions.
4.2 Damage stability criteria

There may be one or several initial conditions (loading conditions) and damage cases under investigation at the same time. An initia l condition is either a condition defined in the damage stability subsystem DA or a condition defined by the floating position of the ship (draught, trim, GM) before flooding. The latter initial conditions are often called local initial conditions because they are defined and stability data are calculated locally in CR using its arguments. All calculation and output functions may be carried out either for a set of local initial conditions or initial conditions defined in DA and for any set of selected damage cases. 4.2.1 Calculation methods The GZ curves are taken as such from the precalculated results of DA or they are calculated in CR if precalculated results are not up-to-date or initial conditions are local ones.
6 (169)
Calculation of the GZ curves is always based on actual calculation modes and arguments of CR. Recalculation of the GZ curves is initiated if these settings are changed since the last calculation of the results in CR or DA. It may happen that recently calculated results i DA are immediately recalculated in CR because of different calculation modes or arguments in CR or DA. The calculation of criteria may be carried out in the presence of heeling moments or without any heeling moment. The moments are linked to the criteria. The minimum GM (maximum KG) which assures compliance with the criteria is calculated from the GZ curve by an iterative method varying GM in the equation GZ = MS + GM*sin(heel). Iteration is terminated when any lesser value of GM (greater value of KG) within the given tolerance does not any more satisfy the requirement. The maximum KG values are always calculated by help of the minimum GM values; first the program calculates the minimum GM and then applies the equation MAXKG = KM - MINGM. 4.2.2 Checking of damage cases Checking of the damage cases means that the program examines whether the damage case is in compliance with the relevant criteria or not in all stages and phases of the damage case. The damage case is checked by calculating the quantities defined by the criteria and comparing them with the requirements. The damage case is in compliance with criteria if all the relevant criteria are met simultaneously in all stages and phases of the damage case. All calculated results related to the stability criteria are stored in the auxiliary data base (unit 4). Retrieving the stored results initiates a comprehensive up-to-date check of results. If the hydrostatic results of the damage case are younger than the stored results of criteria, results of the damage case are out-of-date or any argument of CR is changed, the stored results are rejected. 4.2.3 GM and KG limit curves The minimum GM (maximum KG) limit curve is the minimum GM (maximum KG) which is in compliance with the relevant criteria as a function of draught or trim calculated for a selected set of damage cases. The limit curve is formed by calculating the individual limit curves for all combinations of relevant criteria and damage cases and combining the curves to one overall maximum or minimum curve ensuring that the intersection points between the individual curves are taken properly into account. Both local initial conditions and initial conditions of DA may be used for limit curve calculation. The initial conditions define the argument draughts or trims for the curve and the corresponding minimum GM or maximum KG values are calculated by the iterative method described above. The GM (KG) limit curves can be permanently stored in the data base to be used in other subsystems. The previous chapter presented how to check damage cases. Another way to check whether the damage cases meet the requirements of the relevant criteria, is to compare the corrected GM (KG) of the actual loading condition with the corresponding GM (KG) value of the limit curve calculated for the specified set of damage cases. Because the GM (KG) limit curve may be calculated without any effect of free liquid surfaces and the actual loading condition may contain free surfaces taken into account by various rules, this comparison is not always exact; there is some inaccuracy area on both sides of the limit curve. It may happen that GM of the loading condition is below the limit curve but comparison of requirements and attained values results status OK. If there is any doubt about reliability of the limit curve check, use status check. The status check is always reliable. In the output of the calculation the minimum corrected GM (MINGM) and minimum uncorrected GM (MINGM0) should be quite self-explanatory. In general the MINGM should be used because the GM of the loading conditions used to check compliance is the corrected GM. If the initial condition has a GM reduction GMRED, either calculated from the liquid shift or given explicitly, the difference between the MINGM and MINGM0 is GMRED. I.e. MINGM is the primary calculated information and MINGM0 is derived based on GMRED. Regarding MAXKG, the maximum KG, this is the "uncorrected" MAXKG i.e. it can be compared to the MINGM0. To take into account the possible effect of the free surface correction in the initial condition, the quantity MAXKGL
7 (169)
("MAXKG Liquid") should be used instead of MAXKG in the output. MAXKGL is the "virtual maximum KG corrected for free surfaces" that reflects the same limiting stability value as MINGM. 4.2.4 Output All calculated quantities are stored in a run time description for making it possible for the user to make lists by the help of the standard table output and diagram output functions of NAPA. The subsystem produces also a set of standard lists and plots. 4.2.4.1 Limit curve The overall minimum GM (maximum KG) limit curve as a function of draught or trim and relevant criteria may be plotted or printed. In addition to the overall minimum (maximum), the minimum GM (maximum KG) limit curves of all individual criteria or damage cases may be added to the plot. If desired, a selected set of loading conditions can be marked to the to the plot. 4.2.4.2 Criterion table A criterion table shows, initial conditions, damage cases, damage stages, damage phases and listing sides PS and SB as arguments, all the relevant criteria and their requirements, the corresponding attained values, status indicators showing whether the criterion is met or not, minimum corrected GM values, maximum corrected KG values, minimum uncorrected GM0 values and maximum uncorrected KG0 values. 4.2.4.3 Loading condition table A loading condition table shows the names of the loading requirements, the corresponding attained values, determining damage cases and a status indicator showing whether all criteria are met in all damage cases. 4.2.4.4 Min. GM and max. KG table The min. GM and max. KG table shows, for all initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and sides, the minimum GM and GM0 and maximum KG and KG0 values which are in compliance with the relevant criteria. 4.2.4.5 Summary lists The summary lists offer a quick look at the central results of CR: minimum GM and GM0, maximum KG and KG0 and status. The summary lists are two dimensional tables showing the selected quantities as function of loading (initial) condition and criterion, draught and criterion, trim and criterion, draught and trim, loading (initial) condition and damage case, draught and damage case, trim and damage case and criterion and damage case. 4.2.4.6 Criterion check plot For every criterion, one can plot, the GZ curves of the damage cases combined with, a drawing which shows the properties required by the criteria. 4.2.4.7 Minimum GM check plot This plot is similar to the criterion check plot, but it is based on the GZ curve which is drawn for the minimum GM which is in compliance with the relevant criteria.
8 (169)
4.2.4.8 Openings, freeboard, margin line and special points These tables show how the relevant openings, the freeboard deck edge, the margin line and the special points are situated relative to the waterline in different stages and phases of damage cases.
5 Data concepts
The subsystem provides means to define, handle and store the following data:
s s s s s s s s s s
intact stability criteria damage stability criteria intact stability criterion groups damage stability criterion groups heeling moment curves openings for calculation of downflooding freeboard deck edges for calculation of residual freeboard margin lines bilge lines special points for checking immersion of certain points in the ship.
5.1 Stability criterion

A stability criterion is defined by its type (required property) and corresponding parameter value (requirement). An external moment is connected to the criterion by referring to it by name.
5.2 Criterion group

A criterion group is a named set of stability criteria. The criteria defined by regulations form natural criterion groups.
5.3 Heeling moment

Many criteria must be checked in the presence of a heeling moment. There are two ways to define moments. The first one is to define the moment curve by the help of the regulations giving only few parameters, e.g. name of the lateral profile curve. The second method is to select the type of the moment curve and give the related moment value(s). There are sixteen types of moment curves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. constant moment as the ship is heeling moment distributed as cosine of the heeling angle moment distributed as cosine to a power of two polygon polygon which is made smooth moment by arithmetic expression general wind moment wind moment by IMO wind moment by USSR rules wind moment by IMO MODU CODE for ship-shaped hulls general turning moment turning moment by IMO
9 (169)
13. 14. 15. 16.
turning moment by USSR rules passenger moment moment caused by shifting of load moment caused by grain shift.
5.4 Opening
An opening is a point in the ship through which downflooding may occur. The openings are used to determine the angle of downflooding and the reserve to downflooding. The user selects the relevant openings.
5.5 Freeboard deck edge

A freeboard deck edge is a curve in the ship used for the calculation of the angle at which the freeboard deck immerses and for calculation of residual freeboard. The freeboard deck edge may be defined by referring to a curve defined in the geometry subsystem or it may be a height approximation. The height approximation means that the point at the mid frame at a given height is used instead of a whole curve in freeboard calculations.
5.6 Bilge line

Some criteria are depending on the heeling angle at which the bilge comes out of water. A curve called 'bilge line' is used for this purpose. The bilge line is simply a reference to a curve defined in the geometry subsystem or a point approximation. The point approximation is either an explicitly given point or the point at the mid frame at which the tangent forms a given angle with the y-axis.
5.7 Special point

The immersion angle of a special point is in some criteria used to calculate the maximum allowed heeling angle. Special points are not used when checking angles of downflooding.
5.8 Margin line

A margin line is a curve in the ship used for the calculation of the angle at which the margin line immerses and for calculation of the reserve to immersion of the margin line.
6 Connections to other subsystems

The stability criteria subsystem CR works in close connection to the loading condition subsystem LD and damage stability subsystem DA. In the environment INTACT, CR may use loading conditions defined in LD and LD may use intact stability criteria defined in CR for checking whether the loading conditions are in compliance with the intact stability criteria. In the environment DAMAGE, CR may use initial conditions and damage cases defined in DA and DA may use damage stability criteria defined in CR for checking whether the damage cases are in compliance with the damage stability criteria. The GM (KG) limit curves of intact stability are available in DA and the GM (KG) limit curves of damage stability are available in LD through the CR subsystem. All the geometric entities are created in the geometry subsystem (task DEF). Their definition in CR is simply a reference to the geometric object. The geometric objects used by CR are:
s s s s
profile to calculate lateral area freeboard deck edge bilge line margin line
10 (169)
calculation hull.
The stability criteria subsystem CR may be entered directly from LD or DA or from the TASK level. If CR is entered from LD, the environment INTACT is assigned and the current loading condition is activated for calculation and output. All commands of CR are available except the command that changes the environment. The control is returned to LD by the command END or LD. CR may be entered in two ways from DA. If an output command of DA concerns stability criteria, the program calls CR, assigns the environment DAMAGE, copies all necessary arguments, LQ's, TOO's, PQ's and POO's from DA, performs the output command and returns back to DA. The permanently stored arguments of damage stability criteria remain unchanged. If the damage stability subsystem is entered from DA by the command CR, the program goes to the subsystem CR, assigns the environment DAMAGE, copies all necessary arguments, LQ's, TOO's, PQ's and POO's from DA and waits for commands of CR (all available except the one which changes the environment). If some argument is now changed by an explicit command, it will be stored permanently in the data base. The control is returned to DA by the command END or DA. Both environments and all functions of CR are accessed from the TASK level by calling CR. The environment is selected by the specific command ENV. The default environment is INTACT. Running CR in this way, no argument is copied from other subsystems, but control is fetched from the permanently stored argument sets or explicitly given argument commands.
7 Restrictions
The stability criteria subsystem does not provide
s s s
automatic definition or selection of loading conditions which should be checked automatic definition or selection of damage cases which should be checked automatic definition or selection of relevant stability criteria.
8 General
There are two preconditions for a successful intact stability criteria run: loading conditions and relevant intact criteria. A successful damage stability criteria run needs three preconditions: initial (loading) conditions, damage cases and relevant damage criteria. There is always a default set of draughts (trim=0) defining a few local loading or initial conditions. There is also always some default set of relevant criteria; the one selected by the user in some earlier run or a default set selected by the program if the user has never made his own selection. There is never a default set of damage cases unless CR is activated by a listing command of DA. The shortest useful command sequence in the environment INTACT is: LIST In the environment DAMAGE, the shortest way to get output is to give some listing command concerning stability criteria in DA e.g. LIST DCRT If an intact stability criteria run concerns only loading conditions defined in LD or a damage stability criteria run is called from DA, no calculation arguments are needed; the calculation hull, heeling angles, calculation method etc. are already selected in LD or DA. If any of the loading conditions or initial conditions are defined in CR by the floating position of the ship (local condition), requiring calculation of the GZ curve, the calculation arguments hull, heeling angles and calculation method must be defined. There are always useful default values for all of these arguments and usually there should be no need to change them.
11 (169)
Whenever relevant criteria has been selected for the particular ship, the selected set remains in force until a new selection is done. It should be quite unusual to change the relevant criteria after an initial selection has been made. The functions of the CR subsystem are divided into three categories:
s s s
definition functions output functions administrative functions.
The following chapters describe in detail all the commands related to the functions of this subsystem.
9 Definition functions
The purpose of the definition functions is to define data entities and store them in the data base. There are eight different types of data: criteria, criterion groups, heeling moments, openings, freeboard deck edges, bilge lines, special points and margin lines. The openings and margin lines are common to other subsystems (e.g. DA, LD, STAB). The other data types are depending on CR and it is not possible to define them elsewhere. All other definitions but criteria and criterion groups are common in both environments. The criteria and criterion groups are available only in that environment where they were defined. Definition tasks are started by the commands CRIT, CGR, MOM, OPE, FRB, BIL, POI and MARG. Definitions are terminated by the explicit command OK or by an upper level command of CR. The command SKIP terminates definition without storing the result in the data base.
9.1 Criteria
The criteria are requirements concerning one property of the GZ curve. Because the running environment defines whether the criterion becomes intact stability criterion or damage stability criterion and because most of definition data are common to both types, all what is said in this chapter about definition of criteria is valid for both types of criteria. The exceptions (commands PHA, STA, FIN and PRO) are clearly indicated. The criterion is identified by a name. The program does not make any interpretation concerning the name but the name must not be the same as the name of any criterion group. The criterion may be equipped with a descriptive text, which is printed and plotted instead of the definition name, provided the text is given. The property of the GZ curve that the criterion is dealing with, is expressed by an obligatory TYPE command. Available types of criterian are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. MAXGZ : maximum GZ at least ... MINGZ : minimum reserve of GZ curve to C*sin(heel) MAXHEEL : maximum heeling angle less than ... MINAREA : area under the GZ curve at least ... MINGM : GM at least ... POSMAX : position of the maximum of the GZ curve at least ... DOWNFLD : angle of downflooding at least ... RANGE : range of positive part of the GZ curve at least ... VSTAB : angle of vanishing stability at least ... RESFLD : reserve to downflooding at least ... RESFRB : reserve to immersion of the freeboard at least ... ARATIO1 : area ratio in wind and rolling condition at least ... ARATIO2 : area ratio in wind condition at least ... RESDYN : reserve dynamic stability at least ...
12 (169)
15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
DYNARM : lever of dynamic stability at least ... GZRATIO : ratio GZ/MOM at some point at least ... RESMRG : reserve to immersion of the margin line at least ... SSOLAS : probability of survival s acc. to SOLAS II-1, Part B-1. MACRO : criterion defined by a macro CRANE1 / CRANE2 : crane counter ballasting, area ratio / residual
The required value is given by a compulsory REQ command. The valueis either a constant or, in some connections, an equation. One criterion sets at most one requirement to the GZ curve; if there are several requirements of the same type, there must be also several criteria each corresponding to one requirement. The given requirement may be - (minus sign), meaning that nothing at all is required. The commands PHA, STA, FIN and PRO are accepted only for damage stability requirements in the environment DAMAGE. The commands may be given in addition to the compulsory command REQ and they state different requirements in different flooding stages. The command REQ defines the requirement that is applied before flooding and in all stages of flooding unless PHA, STA, FIN or PRO states an exception. The command PHA defines the requirement (or -) that is applied during intermediate phases of flooding. The command STA defines the requirement (or -) that is applied at the end of every intermediate stage. The command FIN defines the requirement (or -) that is applied at the end of the final stage of flooding (before stage PROGRESSIVE, if any). The command PRO defines the requirement (or -) that is applied in the progressive stage of flooding. These commands have exactly the same parameter alternatives than the command REQ has. The optional command RANGE limits the calculation heeling angles to a part of the GZ curve, i.e. the quantity is calculated within a smaller range of angles than the total range of the GZ curve. For instance, if one wants to calculate the area of the GZ curve between 30 and 40 degrees or the maximum height of the curve between the upright and the angle of downflooding, the RANGE command is necessary. The form of the command is RANGE lim1, lim2; where lim1 and lim2 are the lower and upper limits of the range. The symbol EQ means the angle of the first intercept of the GZ curve and the moment curve, or if there is no moment, the first intercept of the GZ curve and heeling angle axis. The symbol EQZ means the angle of the first intercept of the GZ curve and heeling angle axis (zero heeling moment). The angles EQ and EQZ are same if no heeling moment is acting on the ship. The following alternatives are possible for the limits:
s s s s s s s s s s s s s s
s s s s
ANGLE : given angle in degrees - : from the beginning of the curve (lim1) or to the end of the curve (lim2) EQ : angle of steady equilibrium (first intercept) EQ+ang : from the equilibrium ang degrees forward EQ-ang : from the equilibrium ang degrees backward EQ-ROLL : from the equilibrium rolling angle backward EQZ : angle of the first intercept, zero moment EQZ+ang : from EQZ ang degrees forward EQZ-ang : from EQZ ang degrees backward EQZ-ROLL : from EQZ rolling angle backward DYNA : dynamic heeling angle, i.e. the first intercept of the dynamic stability arm (efi) DYNA+ang : given angle forward from the dynamic heeling angle DYNA-ang : given angle backward from the dynamic heeling angle DECKIMM(a1,a2): angle a2 will be used if the freeboard deck edge immerses prior to angle a1, otherwise a1 is applied -ROLL : from the upright rolling angle backward FA : angle of downflooding, unprotected + weathertight openings FA/p : fraction 1/p of FA (p>0) FAUN : angle of unprotected flooding
13 (169)
s s s s s
FAUN/p : fraction 1/p of FAUN (p>0) FAWE : angle of flooding through weathertight openings FAWE/p : fraction 1/p of FAWE (p>0) MAX : angle of position of the max. of the GZ curve MIN(lim,lim,...) : minimum of the values in the parentheses.
Note that the rolling angle is available only in connection with the moment curves of IMOWEATHER and USSRWEATHER. If the range shrinks to one point, the possibilities RANGE angle; and AT angle; (or the same alternatives as in RANGE) may be used instead of writing 'RANGE a,a' where 'a' is the same angle for both limits. For example, all three following commands mean that the quantity is calculated at the angle of 30 degrees: AT 30, RANGE 30 and RANGE 30,30. The criteria may be calculated under the influence of a heeling moment (some quantities are not affected by moments, e.g. angle of downflooding). The moment is connected to the criterion by referring to its name as MOM name Instructions how to plot extra markings in the criterion check drawings (PLD CRT, PLD MGM, PLD DCRT and PLD DMGM) are possible to save in the definition data of the criterion by the command MRK opt,opt,...; The options depend on the type of the criterion and they must be selected from the following set:
s s s s
s s s s s s s s s s
TH=h : Text height of additional markings. Default that one selected by diagram plotting. PEN=p : Select pen code for additions, p=logical pen code. Default P1011. HPEN=p : Select pen code for auxiliary lines (usually horizontal), p=logical pen code. Default P1011. ID=c : Control for (numeric) identification; c=ON, add standard identification (default); c=OFF, no identification; c='text', use the given text. ARROW : Draw pointers as arrows. Default bare line. U=u : Horizontal coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. Default: line is vertical. V=v : Vertical coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. FLL= c : Raster code for area filling, c<0 means colour. Default 1001. FLA=c : Raster code for filling area 'a', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. FLB=c : Raster code for filling area 'b', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. FLC=c : Raster code for filling area 'c', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. IDA=c : Control for identification area 'a'. See ID= for alternatives. IDB=c : Control for identification area 'b'. See ID= for alternatives. IDC=c : Control for identification area 'c'. See ID= for alternatives.
The following table shows the criterion types and the available options, + = available, - = not available.
MAXGZ GZRATIO MAXHEEL MINAREA MINGM POSMAX DOWNFLD RANGE VSTAB RESFRB RESMRG RESFLD
TH PEN HPEN ID ARROW U V FLL FLA FLB FLC IDA IDB IDC + + + + + - - + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + - - + + + + + - - + + + + - - + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + - - + + + + + - - -
14 (169)
ARATIO1 ARATIO2 RESDYN DYNARM
+ + + +
+ + + -
+ + + -
+ -
+ + + -
+ + + -
+ -
The definition is terminated by the command OK; which stores the criterion in the project data base or by the command SAVE SYSDB; which stores the criterion in the system data base. The definition is skipped by the command SKI; which terminates the definition task without storing. As a summary, the general format of the definition data for an intact criterion is CRI name 'descr. text'; TYPE type; REQ value; RANGE lim1,lim2; MOM name; MRK opt,opt,... OK; The general format of the definition data for a damage criterion is CRI name 'descr. text'; TYPE type; REQ value; PHA value; STA value; FIN value; PRO value; ACC value; RANGE lim1,lim2; MOM name; MRK opt,opt,...; OK; The following chapters contain the detailed description of each criterion and related definition data. Because the TYPE, RANGE and MOM commands are common to all criteria and the commands PHA, STA, FIN, ACC and PRO have exactly the same parameter alternatives than REQ, only the REQ command is described. 9.1.1 Maximum righting lever The criterion with the type MAXGZ requires a minimum value for the maximum height of the GZ curve. If the criterion is equipped with the moment arm curve, the maximum height means the maximum residual lever, i.e. the maximum difference of the GZ curve and the moment arm curve, if not otherwise stated. Note that the maximum may occur at different angles with different moments.
There are four alternatives to give the requirement:
15 (169)
Constant height REQ gz; The required maximum height is equal to the given value gz (m). Height depending on GM REQ BY GM gm; The maximum height depends on the given GM value (m) by the equation 0.5*gm*sin(heel). Source: Department of Energy. Height depending on range REQ BY RANGE gz0, dgz, rng0; The maximum height depends on the range of the GZ curve so that, if the range is less than rng0, the requirement is calculated by the equation gz0+(rng0-range)*dgz. If the range is greater than rng0, the value gz0 is used. The parameters of the command are: gz0 dgz rng0 Source: SBG. Height depending on moment arm at steady equilibrium REQ BY GZE k; The maximum height depends on the height of the GZ curve at the angle of steady equilibrium (first intercept of the GZ curve and the moment arm curve) by the equation k*gze, where k gze dimensionless coefficient, height of the GZ curve at the angle of steady equilibrium (m). required height for ranges greater than rng0 (m), increment of height per degree (m), upper range limit (degrees).
The maximum height means here the maximum height of the GZ curve, not the maximum height of the residual lever. Source: US Navy. 9.1.1.1 Examples CRI IMOGZ 'Max. GZ by IMO Res. A.749'; TYPE MAXGZ; REQ 0.2; RANGE 30, FA; OK; CRI MGZ 'Max. GZ by Dep. of Energy'; TYPE MAXGZ; REQ BY GM 0.5; ** h=0.5*0.5*sin(heel); RANGE -,MIN(15,FA,MAX); OK; CRI GZSBG 'Max. GZ by SBG'; TYPE MAXGZ; REQ BY RANGE 0.2 0.01 60; ** h=0.2+0.01*(60-range); AT 30; OK; CRI GZUS 'Max. GZ by US Navy';
16 (169)
TYPE MAXGZ; REQ BY GZE 1.67; MOM USWIND; OK;
** h=1.67*GZe, i.e. GZe=0.6*h
CRI SOLASGZ 'SOLAS 90, passenger ships, residual lever'; TYPE MAXGZ; REQ -; FIN 0.04; MOM GREATEST; OK; 9.1.2 Maximum heeling angle The criterion with the type MAXHEEL sets a maximum value for the steady equilibrium heeling angle. The angle of the steady equilibrium is the first intercept of the GZ curve and the moment arm curve or the GZ curve and the heel axis.
There are eight alternatives to define the requirement: Constant angle REQ angle; The maximum heeling angle must not exceed the given value 'angle' (degrees). Angle depending on downflooding REQ FA; REQ FAUN; REQ FAWE; The maximum angle is equal to the angle of downflooding; FA = angle at which the first unprotected or weathertight opening immerses; FAUN = angle at which the first unprotected opening immerses; FAWE = angle at which the first weathertight opening immerses. REQ FA=res; REQ FAUN=res; REQ FAWE=res; The maximum angle is equal to the angle at which there is left the given reserve (m) to downflooding. For the difference between FA, FAUN and FAWE, see above. REQ FA=*f; REQ FAUN=*f; REQ FAWE=*f; The maximum angle is equal to the angle at which there is the given fraction f of the original reserve to downflooding left. The original reserve is calculated at the upright position. For the difference between FA, FAUN and FAWE, see above.
17 (169)
REQ FA=<f; REQ FAUN=<f; REQ FAWE=<f; The maximum angle is equal to the given fraction f of the flooding angle, i.e. max.angle = f*fa. For the difference between FA, FAUN and FAWE, see above. Angle depending on freeboard REQ FRB; The maximum angle is equal to the angle of immersion of the freeboard deck edge. The freeboard deck edge immerses at an angle where any point of the freeboard deck edge first goes into water. REQ FRB=res; The maximum angle is equal to the angle at which there is left the given reserve (m) to immersion of the freeboard deck edge. REQ FRB=*f; The maximum angle is equal to the angle at which there is the given fraction f of the original freeboard immersed. The original freeboard is calculated at the upright position. REQ FRB=<f; The maximum angle is equal to the given fraction f of the angle of immersion of the freeboard, i.e. max.angle = f*frba. Angle depending on margin line REQ MRG; REQ MRG=res; REQ MRG=*f; REQ MRG=<f; Same as REQ FRB, REQ FRB=res, REQ FRB=*f and REQ FRB=<f but, instead of the freeboard deck edge, the margin line is used. Angle depending on bilge REQ BILGE; The maximum angle is equal to the angle at which the bilge comes out of water. Angle depending on point REQ POINT; The maximum angle is equal to the minimum of the angles at which the relevant special points immerse. Angle depending on immersion of deck REQ BY DECKIMM a1, a2; The maximum angle is equal to a1 degrees except it may be increased to a2 if no deck immersion occurs within (0,a2), a2 in degrees. Deck immersion is calculated from the freeboard deck edge. Minimum value REQ MIN(val,val,...); The maximum angle is equal to the minimum of the given alternatives val,val,... where val is any of the alternatives: angle, FA, FA=res, FA=*f, FA=<f, FAUN, FAUN=res, FAUN=*f, FAUN=<f, FAWE=res, FAWE=*f, FAWE=<f, FRB, FRB=res, FRB=*f, FRB=<f, MRG, MRG=res, MRG=*f, MRG=<f, BILGE or POINT.
18 (169)
9.1.2.1 Examples CRI IMOPASS 'Max. heel by IMO Reg. for passenger ships'; TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ 10; MOM IMOPASS; OK CRI DOWNFLD 'Downflooding not allowed'; TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ FA; MOM TURN; OK CRI USCG 'Max. heeling by USCG for small pass. ships'; TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ MIN(14,FRB=*0.5); MOM USCGWIND; OK CRI MARPOL 'Max. heeling by MARPOL 25/30'; TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ BY DECKIMM 25 30; OK 9.1.3 Minimum area The criterion with the type MINAREA requires a minimum value for the area under the positive part of the GZ curve or the area between the GZ curve and the moment arm curve.
There are two alternatives to determine the requirement: Constant value REQ area; The minimum area is equal to the given area (m*rad). Area depending on position of max. GZ REQ BY MAX a0,da,amax0; The area depends on the position of the maximum of the GZ curve amax so that, if the position of the max. GZ is less than amax0, the requirement is equal to a0+da*(amax0-amax). If the position of the max. GZ is greater than amax0, the value a0 is used. The parameters of the command are: a0 da area (m*rad), increment of area per one degree (m*rad),
19 (169)
amax0 Source: DNV. 9.1.3.1 Examples
upper limit for the position of the max. GZ (degrees).
CRI IMOA40 'Area within 0, 40 by IMO'; TYPE MINAREA; REQ 0.09; RANGE 0,MIN(40,FA) OK CRI DNVAREA 'Area by DNV'; TYPE MINAREA; REQ BY MAX 0.055,0.001,30; RANGE 0,MAX; OK 9.1.4 Minimum GM The criterion with the type MINGM requires a minimum value for GM. GM is calculated at the upright position (= heeling 0.0) or at an angle given by the command AT (RANGE). Note that the data item MOM have no effect on the requirement or attained value.
** a=0.055+0.001*(30-max);
There are three alternatives to give the requirement: Constant GM REQ gm; The minimum GM is equal to the given corrected gm (m). GM depending on lateral area REQ BY PROF P=p, PROF=(curve,curve,...); GM depends on the lateral area of the ship by the equation GM = P*A*H/(W*tan(T) ), where P is coefficient depending on the operation of the ship (parameter p in the command), A is the lateral area above the waterline (calc. from the profile), H is the distance from the center of A to the center of the underwater portion of the lateral area, W is the displacement and T is the minimum of 14 degrees or the angle at which 1/2 of the freeboard to the deck edge is immersed. The parameters of the command are: P=p PROF=(curve,curve,...) parameter describing wind force (t/m2), (optional) name(s) of curve(s) forming the profile of the ship. The default profile comes from the arguments of CR.
Source: US Coast Guard, Weather Criterion. GM depending on limit curve
20 (169)
REQ BY CURVE t1,gm1 t2,gm2, ... The minimum GM is defined by interpolating its value from the given polygon for the draught of the loading condition. The polygon goes through the points (t1,gm1), (t2,gm2), ... where (t1,t2,... are draughts (m) in ascending order and gm1,gm2,... corresponding GM values (m)). If the draught of the loading condition is outside the range of the polygon, GM of the first or last point is used. REQ BY CURVE DAM=name Like above but the GM limit curve of damage stability is used. 9.1.4.1 Examples CRI GMIMO 'Min. GM by IMO'; TYPE MINGM; REQ 0.15; OK CRI USCG 'Weather crit. by USCG' TYPE MINGM; REQ BY PROF P=0.0608; OK CRI GMLIM 'Limit curve from DA' TYPE MINGM; REQ BY CURVE DAM=GMLIMIT.DA OK; 9.1.5 Position of maximum GZ The criterion with the type POSMAX requires a minimum value for the position of the maximum of the GZ curve. The maximum of the GZ curve occurs at an angle where the tangent of the curve is horizontal. Note that the data items RANGE and MOM have no effect on the requirement or attained value.
REQ angle; The requirement is equal to the given angle (degrees). 9.1.5.1 Example CRI POSMAX 'Position of the max. GZ'; TYPE POSMAX; REQ 30; OK
21 (169)
9.1.6 Angle of downflooding The criterion with the type DOWNFLD requires a minimum value for the angle of downflooding. Note that the data items RANGE and MOM have no effect on the requirement or attained value. Because changing of GM does not change the floating position of the ship at different heeling angles, there is no minimum GM (maximum KG) which is in compliance with this criterion; this criterion is used only for checking of loading conditions.
REQ angle; The minimum immersion angle of the unprotected or weathertight openings is equal to the given angle (degrees). REQ UN=angle; The minimum immersion angle of the unprotected openings is equal to the given angle (degrees). REQ WE=angle; The minimum immersion angle of the weathertight openings is equal to the given angle (degrees). 9.1.6.1 Example CRI DWNFLD 'No downflooding'; TYPE DOWNFLD; REQ 40; OK; 9.1.7 Range of stability The criterion with the type RANGE requires a minimum value for the range of the positive part of the GZ curve. The range is equal to that part of the GZ curve which is to the right from the first intercept of the GZ curve and the horizontal axis or the GZ curve and the moment arm curve and to the left from the second intercept of the GZ curve and the horizontal axis or the GZ curve and the moment arm curve. If there are more than two intercepts, the range is equal to the greatest continuous part.
REQ rng; The requirement is equal to the given range rng (degrees).
22 (169)
REQ BY AREA r a l1 l2; The required range depends on the area under the GZ curve by the equation requirement = r*a/(area under GZ curve) where r is the given range (degrees) and a the given area (mrad). The optional parameters l1 and l2 are limits for calculation of the area under the GZ curve and they have the same alternatives than the limits in the range command (see RANGE). If l1 and l2 are missing, the whole range is used. The maximum required range is limited to r. 9.1.7.1 Examples CRI RANGE 'Min. range of stability 50 degrees'; TYPE RANGE; REQ 50; OK; CRI ARANGE 'Min. range by attained area'; TYPE RANGE; REQ BY AREA 15 0.015 - MIN(FA,22) OK; 9.1.8 Angle of vanishing stability The criterion with the type VSTAB requires a minimum value for the angle of vanishing stability (second intercept). If there are more than two intercepts, the angle of vanishing stability is equal to the second intercept of the positive part which is most to the right (greatest angles).
REQ angle; The requirement is equal to the given angle (degrees). 9.1.8.1 Example CRI VSTAB 'Angle of vanishing stability > 40'; TYPE VSTAB; REQ 40; OK; 9.1.9 Reserve to downflooding The criterion with the type RESFLD requires a minimum value for the reserve to downflooding. The reserve to downflooding is the minimum height of the relevant openings from the waterline. The heights of the openings from the waterline are calculated at the angle of steady equilibrium. Note that changing of GM changes the reserve only by moving the angle of the steady equilibrium. Therefore, it is not possible always to find a minimum GM which is in compliance with this criterion.
23 (169)
REQ r; The requirement is equal to the given reserve r (m). The reserve is calculated from the unprotected and weathertight openings. REQ UN=r; The requirement is equal to the given reserve r (m). The reserve is calculated from the unprotected openings. REQ WE=r; The requirement is equal to the given reserve r (m). The reserve is calculated from the weathertight openings. 9.1.9.1 Example CRI RSRV 'Reserve to downflooding 0.5 m' TYPE RESFLD; REQ 0.5; OK; 9.1.10 Reserve to immersion of freeboard The criterion with the type RESFRB requires a minimum value for the residual freeboard. The residual freeboard is the minimum height of the freeboard deck edge from the waterline. The minimum height is calculated at the angle of steady equilibrium. Note that changing of GM changes the reserve only by moving the angle of the steady equilibrium. Therefore, it is not possible always to find a minimum GM which is in compliance with this criterion.
REQ r; The requirement is equal to the given reserve r (m). REQ *f; The required reserve at the steady equilibrium angle is equal to f*(reserve measured at the upright), i.e. at the steady equilibrium there is (1-f) of the original reserve used. 9.1.10.1 Example CRI RFRB '1/4 of freebrd immersed'
24 (169)
TYPE RESFRB; REQ *0.75; OK; 9.1.11 Area ratio in wind and rolling condition The criterion with the type ARATIO1 requires a minimum value for the area ratio b/a. The area b is equal to the righting energy and the area a is equal to the capsizing energy due to rolling and wind (see the figure below). Note that the GZ curve for the negative heeling angles is got by reflecting the corresponding positive values.
REQ k; The requirement is equal to the given value k. Source: IMO Weather Criterion, USSR Weather Criterion. 9.1.11.1 Example CRI IMOW 'IMO weather, rolling 25 deg windward'; TYPE ARATIO1; REQ 1.0; RANGE EQ-25,MIN(50,FA) MOM IMOWEAT; OK; 9.1.12 Area ratio in wind condition The criterion with the type ARATIO2 requires a minimum value for the area ratio (a+b)/(b+c), where (a+b) is area under the GZ curve and (b+c) is area under the moment arm curve (see the figure below).
REQ k; The requirement is equal to the given value k. Source: Regulations for Mobile Offshore Units by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
25 (169)
9.1.12.1 Example CRI MODU 'Reg. for mobile offshore units by NMD'; TYPE ARATIO2; REQ 1.4; MOM WIND; OK; 9.1.13 Reserve dynamic stability The criterion with the type RESDYN requires a minimum value for the area ratio a/(a+b) (see the figure below), i.e. for the fraction of the reserve dynamic stability (a) of the total area under the GZ curve (a+b).
REQ k; The requirement is equal to the given value of k, i.e. k=a/(a+b). Source: US Navy. 9.1.13.1 Example CRI LIFT 'US Navy, heavy lifting'; TYPE RESDYN; REQ 0.4; MOM LIFT; OK; 9.1.14 Dynamic stability arm The criterion with the type DYNARM requires a minimum value for the dynamic stability arm at a given angle. The dynamic stability arm is calculated as an integral over the difference of the righting arm and heeling arm curves from the heeling angle 0.0 to the given angle (area a-b in the following figure).
REQ d; The requirement is equal to the dynamic stability arm d (m*rad).
26 (169)
9.1.14.1 Example CRI DYNSTAB 'Dynamic stability arm at angle of max. GZ'; TYPE DYNARM; REQ 0.05; RANGE 0,MAX; MOM PULL; OK; 9.1.15 GZ/MOM ratio The criterion with the type GZRATIO requires that, at some heeling angle, the ratio (righting lever)/(heeling moment arm) attains at least the given value.
REQ k; The requirement is equal to the ratio k, i.e. k=GZ/MOM (k dimensionless). Source: IMO MODU CODE 9.1.15.1 Example CRI GZMOMRATIO 'GZ at least twice wind heeling mom.' REQ 2; RANGE EQ,EQ+7 OK; 9.1.16 Reserve to immersion of margin line The criterion of type RESMRG requires a minimum value for the reserve to immersion of the margin line. This criterion is similar to the criterion 'reserve to immersion of freeboard', RESFRB, but instead of the freeboard deck edge, the margin line is used (see 2.1.10). 9.1.17 MINGZ - Minimum reserve to C*Sin(heel) The criterion of type MINGZ requires a minimum value for the reserve between the GZ curve and the curve given by cf*SIN(HEEL). With cf=0 the user can dictate the minimum value for the GZ curve e.g. GZ>0 for all heeling angles under consideration. The requirement is specified by: REQ res cf requirement is equal to min. reserve to cf*sin(heel), i.e. GZ has to be at least res +cf*sin(heel). Note that in output the requirement and attained value are reserves to cf*sin(heel). TYPE GZRATIO;
Please note that in the case of res=0, the requirement for determing the maximum KG (REQ=ATTV) will always be satisfied immediately if either end of the range is an intercept with the heeling axis (i.e. if the limiting heeling angles
27 (169)
have GZ=0). This will result in the KG value of the case being reported as the MAXKG value. For this reason it is best to use the macro MODU.MINGZ0 in the NAPADB in a criteria of type MACRO to evaluate the criteria that the GZ must be positive between upright and the angle of vanishing stability. See the criteria MODU.MINGZ0 in the NAPADB for an example of this type of definition.
9.1.18 Crane criteria The crane counter ballasting criteria envolve two separate stability (GZ) curves. The first one (with the crane load) is defined in a table. This curve is used for calculation of the equlibrium heeling angle before the sudden loss of the crane load. The second GZ curve (from the argument LOAD in CR_I) is used for the calculation of the areas a and b.
There are two alternatives for crane criteria. Both have the same principle but the calculation of the attained value from the areas a and b is different:
s s
CRANE1 : area ratio a/b CRANE2 : area residual a-b, unit is mrad
The GZ curve should be calculated for both sides and MODE AUTO should be used. These new criteria can be used with MAXHEEL criterion. However, it should be noted that if a crane criterion is relevant, the whole GZ curve is used. Min.GM and Max.KG cannot be calculated for the crane criteria. 9.1.18.1 Example First two loading cases are defined. One with the crane load LC1_CRANE and one without it LC1. The GZ curve with the crane load is dumped into a table from LD and saved for later use in the criteria calculation. The table must contain columns for heeling angles and righting levers (HEEL and HPHI). Additionally, the heeling moment can also be given separately (column MOMNT and displacement in tonnes as a quantity, QNT DISP value). If this is not given, the moment is assumed to be zero and a notification of this is displayed. The possible moment after the loss of crane load is given normally in the criterion definition. An example is shown below: LIS STA TAB=CRANE_TABLE TAB TREAT CRANE_TABLE SAVE END This table is used for the calculation of the heeling angle before the sudden loss of the crane load. The table name is shown in the diagram plot in a similar manner as the relevant openings. The criterion definition is: CRI CRANECRIT 'Crane counter ballasting criterion'; TYPE CRANE1;
28 (169)
REQ 1.4 CRANE_TABLE; MOM MOMENT; OK; Note that in some cases the moment is negative.
9.2 Using of macros in criteria calculation

The program supports macros in calculation of criteria. If the argument of the command REQ (also of the commands PHA, STA, FIN and PRO in env. DA) is a name, it is assumed to be name of a macro. The program expects that the macro calculates the requirement and assigns its value to the variable @REQ. The attained value is calculated in the normal way, if the type of the criterion defines the quantity, i.e. the type is one of MAXGZ, MINGZ, MAXHEEL, MINAREA, MINGM, POSMAX, DOWNFLD, RANGE, VSTAB, RESFLD, RESFRB, RESMRG, ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN, DYNARM or GZRATIO. However, if the type of the criterion is MACRO, the program expects that the macro calculates also the attained value and assigns it to the variable @ATT. One can use the MACRO-type for calculation of anything from which one can get the status met/not met by comparing the attained value with the requirement. Because the program does not know what the criterion of type MACRO is calculating, the definition data of the criterion should include the commands MET, CHANGE, TOL and UNIT. For the same reason, tho program cannot plot the criterion by PLD CRC or PLD DCRC. If + is added to the end of the command as TYPE MACRO +, the range of the GZ curve will be handled like in criterion ARATIO1, i.e. if the range is on one side only, the missing side will be added to the curve and the whole curve having both sides will be transferred to the macro. Note that commands MET, CHANGE, TOL and UNIT are only relevant when the criterion type is MACRO. The command MET defines when the criterion is met, i.e. should the attained value be greater or lesser than the requirement for getting the status OK. There are four alternatives of the command: MET MET MET MET IF IF IF IF ATT>REQ REQ<ATT ATT<REQ REQ>ATT
The two first alternatives state that the attained value should be greater than the requirement and the two last alternetives state that the attained value should lesser than the requirement. The default assumption is ATT>REQ. The command CHANGE tells the program how the attained value changes when GM changes. This data is needed in calculation of the minimum GM. The program accepts the alternatives: CHANGE CHANGE CHANGE CHANGE CHANGE NO + I D
The first alternative states that the attained value does not change with GM, i.e. calculation of the minimum GM is not done. The alternatives 2 and 3 are for telling that the attained value increases when GM increases and the alternatives 4 and 5 are for telling that the attained value decreases when GM increases. The default assumption is NO. The tolerance of the iteration of the minimum GM is defined by TOL t where t is the tolerance (>0.0). The default value is 0.001. The unit of the attained and required values is given by UNIT u
29 (169)
Default for u is empty (dimensionless). For making easier to use macros, the program assigns automaticly a set of variables. The variables are not normal variables but the program keeps own record of them and the values are got by the specific function CR.VALUE(name). The variables which are available by CR.VALUE are listed later. Of course, also other variables, for instance assigned by the command ASG, and functions may be used in the macros. Three examples how to use macros in the criteria. The first example calculates the requirement for the area-criterion from the equation 0.055+0.001*(30-fi), where fi is either the position of the maximum GZ or half of the angle of vanishing stability, whichever is lesser. CRIT, SFVAREA, 'Area by SFV' TYPE MINAREA REQ SAREA OK @@ Macro SAREA @am=cr.value('AMAX') @av=cr.value('AVS') @fi=av/2 @if am<fi @fi=am @fi=fi/ro @req=0.055+0.001*(30-fi) The second example calculates visibility from the bridge when the ship is in the even keel. CRIT, VISIBILITY, 'Forward view' TYPE MACRO REQ FRWV MET IF ATT<REQ CHA NO UNIT 'm' OK @@ Macro FRWV. Visibility at most 2*length or 500 m @@ whichever is lesser. (xb,zb) view point on the bridge, @@ (xf,zf) point blocking forward view. @t=cr.value('T0') @xb=20 @zb=20 @xf=110 @zf=10 @l=ref('LOA') @req=2*l @if req>500 @req=500 @if abs(zb-zf)<0.01 then @dis=9999.9 @else @dis=(t-zf)*(xb-xf)/(zb-zf) @if dis<0 @dis=9999.9 @endif @att=dis The third example calculates the maximum height of the GZ curve so, that there is a reserve of 4 cm to the moment arm but GZ should be at least 10 cm. The range is not limited in this case. CRIT, MMXGZ, 'GZ at least mom/disp+0.04 or 0.1' TYPE MACRO REQ MMXGZ
30 (169)
MOM SOLASWIND MET IF ATT>REQ CHA + TOL 0.001 UNIT 'm' OK @@ Macro MMXGZ. @mm=arr(2) @gz=arr(2) @mm=cr.value('MOM') @gz=cr.value('GZ') @m0=mm(1) @dsp=cr.value('DISP') @req=m0/dsp+0.04 @if req<0.1 @req=0.1 @att=-9999.9 @np=rsize(gz) @for i=1,np @if gz(i)>att @att=gz(i) @next The variables available by the function CR.VALUE are listed below. The function is called as @var=cr.value(name) where 'name' is any name from the underlying list and @var is receiving variable. The special alternative cr.value() assigns names of all current variables to the receiving string array. The array is empty until some macro-criterion is calculated. The values of the variables change according to the current case, criterion and GM (in min. GM iteration), i.e. always before calling the macro, all variables are updated. AZI RHO SIGN Azimuth angle (rad) Density of sea water (t/m3) Sign of the side, +1 = towards positive angles (port side if the orientation is righthanded, starboard side if the orientation is lefthanded), -1 = towards negative angles (port side if the orientation is lefthanded, starboard side if the orientation is righthanded) Displacement (mass) of the ship (t) x-coordinate of the center of mass of the ship (m) y-coordinate of the center of mass of the ship (m) z-coordinate of the center of mass of the ship (m) Draught at the upright (m) Trim at the upright (rad) Equilibrium heeling angle (rad) Draught at the equilibrium heeling angle (m) Trim at the equilibrium heeling angle (rad) KM of the ship (m) Initial uncorrected GM of the ship (m GM-reduction due to free surfaces of the ship (m) Maximum GZ of the stability curve (m)
DISP XCG YCG ZCG T0 TR0 HEEL T TR KMT GM0 GMRED MAXGZ
31 (169)
AMAX AVS OPIMM UNOPIMM OPRES UNOPRES FRBIMM FRBRES MRGIMM MRGRES MGM LLIM RLIM ANG GZ MOM EPHI TF TRF LOAD INIT DAM STAGE PHASE
Angle where MAXGZ occurs (rad) Angle of vanishing stability (rad) Immersion angle of unprotected and weathertight openings (rad) Immersion angle of unprotected openings (rad) Reserve to immersion of unprotected and weathertight openings (m) Reserve to immersion of unprotected openings (m) Immersion angle of freeboard deck edge (rad) Reserve to immersion of freeboard deck edge (m) Immersion angle of margin line (rad) Reserve to immersion of margin line (rad) Corrected GM or corrected minimum GM or corrected GM during iteration of the minimum GM (m) Left limit of the range as defined by the command RANGE (if RANGE is missing, the minimum angle of GZ curve) (rad) Right limit of the range as defined by the command RANGE (if RANGE is missing, the maximum angle of GZ curve) (rad) (array) Argument heeling angles of the smooth GZ curve (smooth = as the GZ curve occurs in calculations) (rad) (array) GZ values corresponding to the angles of ANG (m) (array) Moment as a function of heel (t*m). The argument angles from the array ANG. (array) Dynamic stability arm as a function of heel (m*rad). The argument angles from the array ANG. (array) Draught as a function of heel (m). The argument angles from the array ANG. (array) Trim as a function of heel (rad). The argument angles from the array ANG. Name of the loading condition (only in env. INTACT) Name of the initial condition (only in env. DAMAGE) Name of the damage (only in env. DAMAGE) Name of the stage (only in env. DAMAGE) Name of the phase (only in env. DAMAGE)
9.3 Criterion group

For the sake of easiness of use, one may define criterion groups, which make it possible to reference to several criteria by one single command. A criterion group is simply a named list of criteria. There is no limitations on number or types of criteria included in the group. CGROUP name 'descriptive text'; The command CGROUP starts definition of a criterion group. The parameter 'name' is the name of the group and the optional parameter 'descriptive text' is used as clarifying text in lists and plots. The name of the group must not be name of any criterion. The subcommand CRI of CGROUP gives the name list of criteria included in the group: CRI cri,cri,...;
32 (169)
where cri is name of a (existing) criterion. The command OK terminates the definition and stores it in the project data base. The command SAVE SYSDB terminates the definition and stores it in the system data base. The command SKI terminates the definition without storing it. Note that the criterion group is available only in that environment where it is defined. Example: CGROUP IMO 'Criteria by IMO Resolution A.749'; CRI IMOHEIGHT,IMPOSMAX,IMOGM,IMOA0-30,IMOA0-40,IMOA30-40; OK;
9.4 Heeling moments

The ship may be subjected to different (external) forces which make the ship to heel. These forces are described by moment curves. A moment curve is moment experienced by the ship as a function of the heeling angle. The moments are taken into calculation by referring to them in the definitions of the criteria. The same moments are available in both environments. There are two main types of heeling moment curves:
s
Moment curves which do not depend on the actual loading condition. The moment values for these curves are known by the program all the time. Moment curves which depend on some attributes of the loading conditions, e.g. draught. The actual moment values for these curves are not known before the criteria containing them are applied to the loading conditions or damage cases.
The following features are common to all moment curves:

s
s s
The moment curve is identified by a name. The program does not make any interpretation concerning the name or there are no reserved names. The moment curve may be equipped with a descriptive text, whichis used in output instead of the definition name. The moment curves which do not depend on loading conditions are defined by giving the shape of the moment curve (command CURVE) and one or more moment values related to the curve (command MOM). The moment curves which depend on loading conditions defined by giving the type of the moment curve (command TYPE, defining implicitly shape of the curve) and one or more parameters related to the given type (command PAR). The definition is terminated and the result is stored in theproject data base by the command OK or it is stored in the system data base by the command SAVE SYSDB . The command SKI terminates the definition without storing the result.
As a summary, the general format of the definition data for both types of moment curves is MOM name 'descr. text'; CURVE shape; ** shape of mom. curve MOM m0; ** moment value(s) OK; MOM name 'descr. text'; TYPE type; ** type of moment PAR p; ** parameter value(s) OK; 9.4.1 Moments independent of loading conditions and damage cases There are seven different types of moment curves which do not depend on loading conditions, initial conditions or damage cases: constant, cosine, cosine to the power of two, polygon, smooth curve, NAPA calculator expression or NAPA macro. The next seven chapters describe how these moment curves are defined.
33 (169)
9.4.1.1 Constant moment The constant moment curve has the same moment value at all heeling angles. Definition data: CURVE CONSTANT; MOM m0; where m0 is the constant moment (tm). Example: MOM PASS 'Moment due to passengers'; CURVE CONSTANT; MOM 200; OK; 9.4.1.2 Shape cosine This type of moment curve makes the moment to vary as cosine of the heeling angle, i.e. MOM = M0*cos(heel). Definition data: CURVE COS; MOM m0; where m0 is the moment value at heeling angle 0.0 deg. (tm). Example: MOM WIND 'Wind'; CURVE COS; MOM 1150; OK; 9.4.1.3 Shape cosine to the power of two This type of moment curve makes the moment to vary as cosine of the heeling angle to the power of two, i.e. MOM = M0*cos(heel)**2. Definition data: CURVE COS2; MOM m0; where m0 is the moment value at heeling angle 0.0 deg. (tm). Example: MOM WEATHER 'Weather'; CURVE COS2; MOM 1250; OK; 9.4.1.4 Polygon A polygon shaped curve may be used, for instance, if there are moments derived from the wind tunnel tests. Definition data: CURVE POLYGON; MOM (angle,mom),(angle,mom),...; where angle is given in degrees and mom in tm. The polygon should cover the whole range of calculation heeling angles. Example: MOM WINDTEST 'Wind tunnel test';
34 (169)
CURVE POLYGON; MOM (0,1050) (20,1150) (30,1210) (40,1290) (50,1400); OK; 9.4.1.5 Smooth curve This moment curve is otherwise same as polygon, but the given points are connected by a smooth curve. Definition data: CURVE SMOOTH; MOM (angle,mom),(angle,mom),...; where angle is given in degrees and mom in tm. The curve should cover the whole range of calculation heeling angles. Example: MOM WINDTEST 'Wind tunnel test'; CURVE SMOOTH; MOM (0,1050) (20,1150) (30,1210) (40,1290) (50,1400); OK; 9.4.1.6 Expression The moment curve is defined by an arithmetic expression of the NAPA calculator, heeling angle (HEEL) as argument. Definition data: CURVE EXPR; MOM expr; where expr is an expression for the NAPA calculator. Note! To be sure that the program does not get into syntax error, put the expression inside the apostrophes. Example: MOM LIFT 'Weight suspended at (Y,Z)' CURVE EXPR; MOM 'W*(Y*COS(HEEL)+Z*SIN(HEEL))' OK; 9.4.1.7 Macro The moment curve is defined by a macro. Definition data: MOM mname text CURVE MACRO MOM mac OK where 'mac' is name of the macro. The program expects that the macro returns the moment by the variable @MOMENT. If the variable is a single number, the moment curve is assumed to be constant. If the variable is an array, the moment is a function of heel and the program expects that the moment values correspond to the angles of the array ANG. The array ANG is always available by calling CR.VALUE('ANG'). Note the similarity to the moment type 'arithmetic expression', EXPR. 9.4.2 Moments dependent on loading conditions and damage cases The following moment curves depend on loading conditions and damage cases by one or more parameters. The type of the moment curve implicitly defines the shape of curve.
35 (169)
9.4.2.1 Wind moment The wind moment is calculated by the equation MOM = C*A*Z, where the constant C describes the wind pressure (t/ m2), A is the lateral area of the ship above the waterline (m2) and Z is the vertical distance from the center of A to the center of the underwater lateral area, to the half draught or to the waterline. The shape of the moment curve is assumed to be constant. Definition data: TYPE WIND; PAR C=c, PROF=(curve,curve,...), arm; where C=c PROF=(curve,curve,...) (optional) name(s) of curve(s) forming the profile. Default for the profile is got from the arguments of CR. If there is only one curve, parentheses may be omitted. If the loading condition has container loads on the deck, their profile is automatically added to the profile curves. arm (optional) use the half draught or waterline instead of the center of the underwater lateral lateral area in calculation of Z. Alternatives: TP2 = half draught, WL = waterline. constant C in the above equation (t/m2).
Example: MOM USCG 'USCG - small vessels'; TYPE WIND; PAR C=0.0732, PROF=(HULLPROF,HOUSE); OK; 9.4.2.2 Wind moment by IMO This moment is calculated by the equation MOM = P*A*Z, where P is taken from the regulations IMO Res. A.562(14) (P=1.5*0.0514 t/m2, gust wind pressure for calculation of lw2, P=.0514 t/m2 for calculation of lw1), A is the lateral area of the ship above the waterline (m2) and Z is the vertical distance from the center of A to the center of the underwater lateral area, to the half draught or to the waterline (m). Note that calculation of the rolling angle is connected to the lever lw1. Definition data (all parameters optional): TYPE IMOWEATHER; PAR AK=a, P=p, PROF=(curve,curve,...), ROLL=r, arm; where AK=a P=p PROF=(curve,curve,...) total area of bilge keels and bar keel (m2), default 0. (gust) wind pressure if other than 0.0514 (t/m2). name(s) of curve(s) forming the profile. Default for the profile is got from the arguments of CR. If there is only one curve, parentheses may be omitted. If the loading condition has container loads on the deck, their profile is automatically added to the profile curves. angle of roll if not the one calculated by the program (deg). (optional) use the half draught or waterline instead of the center of the underwater lateral lateral area in calculation of Z. Alternatives: TP2 = half draught, WL = waterline.
ROLL=r arm
Example:
36 (169)
MOM IMOW 'IMO severe wind moment'; TYPE IMOWEATHER; PAR PROF=PROFILE; OK; Although the input for this moment is according to the first lever (lw1), the result in a criteria will be according to the second one lw2 (lw2=lw1*1.5).
9.4.2.3 Wind moment by USSR Rules This moment is like the wind moment of IMO, but the wind pressure is calculated from the table 2.1.2.2 of the rule book. Note that calculation of the rolling angle is connected to this moment. Definition data (all parameters optional): TYPE USSRWEATHER; PAR NAV=n, AK=a, P=p, PROF=(curve,curve,...), ROLL=r, arm; where NAV=n AK=a P=p PROF=(curve,curve,...) area of navigation, 0=unrestricted, 1=restricted I, 2=restricted II, default unrestricted (=0). total area of bilge keels or area of the projection of the bar keel or sum of these (m2). Sharp bilges are given by a large number (>0.04*L*B), e.g. 100000. wind pressure if other than the one calculated by the program (Pa). name(s) of curve(s) forming the profile. Default for the profile is got from the arguments of CR. If there is only one curve, parentheses may be omitted. If the loading condition has container loads on the deck, their profile is automatically added to the profile curves. angle of roll if not the one calculated by the program (deg). (optional) use the half draught or waterline instead of the center of the underwater lateral lateral area in calculation of Z. Alternatives: TP2 = half draught, WL = waterline.
ROLL=r arm
Example: MOM USSRW 'Wind moment by USSR Rules'; TYPE USSRWEATHER; OK; 9.4.2.4 Wind moment for MODUs The wind moment is calculated by the equation MOM = C*A*Z*cos(heel), where the constant C describes the wind pressure (t/m2), A is the lateral area of the ship above the waterline (m2) and Z is the vertical distance from the center of A to the center of the underwater lateral area, to the half draught or to the waterline (m). The shape of the moment curve is cosine of the heeling angle. If a wind model is used in the arguments, the shape and unerwater resistance coefficients and areas from the wind model table aretaken into consideration in the moment calculation. Definition data: TYPE WINDMODU; PAR C=c, PROF=(curve,curve,...), arm; where C=c PROF=(cur,cur,...) wind pressure (t/m2) (C in the above equation). (optional): name(s) of curve(s) forming the profile. Default for the profile is got from the arguments of CR. If there is only one curve, parentheses may be
37 (169)
omitted. If the loading condition has container loads on the deck, their profile is automatically added to the profile curves. arm (optional) use the half draught or waterline instead of the center of the underwater lateral lateral area in calculation of Z. Alternatives: TP2 = half draught, WL = waterline, Z0=z: from the given point z.
Example: MOM OFFSHORE 'Severe storm condition'; TYPE WINDMODU; PAR C=0.165; OK; 9.4.2.5 Turning moment The moment caused by turning of the ship is calculated from the equation MOM = C*DISP*(KG-d/2), where the constant C depends on the speed and some characteristics of the ship, DISP is displacement of the ship, KG is height of the center of gravity and d is draught in the ship. The shape of the moment curve is assumed to be constant. Definition data: TYPE TURN; PAR C=c; where c is the value of the constant C in the previous equation (dimensionless) . Example: MOM TURN 'Turning 10 m/s'; TYPE TURN; PAR C=0.0134; OK; 9.4.2.6 Turning moment by IMO The moment caused by turning according to the IMO Res. A.749 is calculated by the equation MOM = 0.02*V0**2/ L*DISP*(KG-d/2), where V0 is service speed (m/s), L is length of waterline (m), DISP is displacement (t), KG is center of gravity (m) and d is mean draught (m). The shape of the moment curve is assumed to be constant. Definition data (parameter optional): TYPE IMOTURN; PAR V=v0; where v0 is the service speed (m/s). Default value for v0 is got from the arguments of CR. Example: MOM IMOTURN 'Turning by IMO, speed 8 m/s'; TYPE IMOTURN; PAR V=8; OK 9.4.2.7 Turning moment by USSR Rules The moment caused by turning according to the USSR Rules is calculated by the equation MOM = 0.024*V80**2/ L*DISP*(KG-d/2), where V80 is 80% of the full speed (m/s), L is length of the ship (m), DISP is displacement (t), KG is center of gravity (m) and d is mean draught (m). The shape of the moment curve is assumed to be constant. Definition data (parameter optional): TYPE USSRTURN; PAR V=v0;
38 (169)
where v0 is the full speed (m/s). Default value for v0 is got from the arguments of CR. Example: MOM USSRTURN 'Turning by USSR Rules, full speed 12 m/s'; TYPE USSRTURN; PAR V=12; OK; 9.4.2.8 Passenger moment The moment caused by crowding of passengers is calculated by the equation MOM = n*w*dy, where n is number of passengers, w is average weight of passengers and dy average transverse shift of passengers. Definition data (all parameters optional): TYPE PASSENGER; PAR N=n, W=w, SHIFT=dy; where N=n : W=w : SHIFT=dy : Example: MOM PASS 'Passengers moving 17 m'; TYPE PASSENGER; PAR SHIFT=17; OK; 9.4.2.9 Moment by load shift The moment caused by shifting of load is calculated by the equation MOM = dy1*LDW1+dy2*LDW2+..., where dy1, dy2,... are transverse shifts of loads (m) and LDW1, LDW2,... are weights of load components (t). The shape of the moment curve is assumed to be a straight line going through the points (0,m0) and (a,f*m0) where m0 is the moment calculated from the above equation and a and f are parameters of the moment definition. Definition data: TYPE LOADSHIFT; PAR SHIFT=(ld1,dy1,ld2,dy2,...), ANG=a, FRAC=f; where SHIFT=(ld1,dy1,ld2,dy2,...) ANG=a FRAC=f Example: MOM CATTLE 'Shift of livestock and fodder'; TYPE LOADSHIFT; PAR SHIFT=(LVS,2.2,FDD,1.5), ANG=40, FRAC=0.8; OK; load types ld1, ld2,... are moved dy1, dy2, ... meters transversally. Weights of the load types are fetched from the loading conditions. (optional) angle of the point through which the straight line goes (deg) (the other point is 0). (optional) fraction of the moment m0 at the angle ANG=a. Default is 1, i.e. the line is horizontal. number of passengers if other than that in the arguments of CR. average weight of passengers (kg). Default 75 kg. average transverse shift (m). Default B/2.
39 (169)
9.4.2.10 Moment by grain shift The heeling moment due to grain shift is calculated according to the specifications of SOLAS 74. Calculation of the heeling moment is totally based on data in loading conditions and there is no need for extra parameters. Definition data is simply TYPE GRAINSHIFT; Example: MOM GRAIN 'Grain shift by SOLAS 74'; TYPE GRAIN; OK; 9.4.3 Combined moment A combined moment is the sum, maximum or product of two or more moment curves. Definition data for a sum moment: SUM name,name,...; where 'name' is the name of any noncombined moment curve. Definition data for maximum moment is: MAX m1,m2,...; where 'm1,m2...' are names of moment curves (must not be sum, max or product). Definition data for product of moment is: PROD m1,m2,...; where 'm1,m2...' are names of moment curves (must not be sum, max or product). Example: MOM PASS+TURN 'Passenger crowding and turning'; SUM PASS,TURN; OK;
9.5 Opening
Openings are used to determine the angle of downflooding and the reserve to downflooding at the steady equilibrium heeling angle. The openings defined in CR as well as in other subsystems may be used for the calculation of downflooding. The openings which contribute to the calculation of downflooding are selected by the commands ROP (..levant OP.nings) and IRO (.R.elevant ..enings), see the chapter ARGUMENTS. Definition data for openings are: OPENING name 'descr. text'; TYPE type; POS (x,y,z); CONN conn; OK; where TYPE Type of opening: - UNPROTECTED, - WEATHERTIGHT - WATERTIGHT or - UNNOPROGRESSIVE.
40 (169)
All openings but WATERTIGHT ones cause downflooding. The openings UNNOPROGRESSIVE are like UNPROTECTED ones with the exception that progressive flooding is not spreading trough these openings in the progressive flooding stage of damage stability. WEPROGRESSIVE is like WEATHERTIGHT but in the progressive stage, water is spreading through it. Default is UNPROTECTED. POS (x,y,z); CON cmp,cmp; Position of the lowest point of the opening in the ship coordinate system. Compartments connected by the opening; cmp is name of the compartment or SEA which means the space outside the ship. This data is needed only if one wants to calculate the stepped GZ curve caused by downflooding (see the argument command MODE STEP). This alternative differs from the connection command 'CON cmp,cmp' so that water can run through the opening only in the direction of the arrow. Terminate definition and store the opening in the data base. Terminate definition without storing the result.
CON cmp -> cmp; OK; SKIP;
9.6 Freeboard deck edge

The freeboard of the ship is defined as the minimum distance of the freeboard deck edge from the waterline. Geometry of the curve which represents the freeboard deck edge, must be defined in the geometry subsystem (task DEF). Definition of the freeboard deck edge is done by the commands: FRB name 'descr. text'; CUR cname; OK; where 'CUR cname' refers to an existing curve. If the curve is open (first and last point do not coincide), the program assumes it symmetric with respect to y=0. If the curve is closed (first and last point coincide), the curve is used as such. The command SKIP instead of OK skips the definition. The freeboard deck edge is taken into use by the command CFRB (see the arguments). See also the command CFRB for possibility to use a height approximation for freeboard calculation.
9.7 Bilge line

Some criteria calculates the angle at which the bilge comes out of water. This is done by the help of a line called bilge line. Geometry of the bilge line (or curve) must be defined in the geometry subsystem (task DEF). Definition of the bilge line in CR is done by the commands: BILGE name 'descr. text'; CUR cname; OK; where 'CUR cname' refers to an existing curve. The command SKIP instead of OK skips the definition. The bilge line is taken into use by the command CBILGE (see the arguments). See also the command CBILGE for possibility to use a point or tangent approximation instead of the whole curve.
9.8 Special point

Some criteria calculates the angle at which some special points immerse. For this purpose one can define special points. The points which are taken into account for this use are selected by the commands RPO (..levant PO.nts) and IPO (..relevant PO.nts). The definition data for a special point is as follows: POINT name 'descr. text'; POS (x,y,z); OK;
41 (169)
The command SKIP instead of OK skips the definition.
9.9 Margin line

The margin line is needed to get information about position of the margin line points relative to the waterline. The margin line is defined by dividing the length of the ship into one or several parts in the direction of the x-axis and applying one defining method (polygon or curve) in each interval. If the curve is open (first and last point do not coincide), the program assumes it symmetric with respect to y=0. If the curve is closed (first and last point coincide), the curve is used as such. The margin lines defined in CR as well as in other subsystems may be used. Definition data for a margin line are: MARGIN name 'descr. text'; INTERVAL x1,x2; Definition interval. If there is no record of this kind, the margin line is supposed to consist of one part. The combination -,x2 means from the after end of the ship to x2 and x1,+ from x1 to the fore end of the ship. x1,x2: limits of the interval, x2>x1. Form of the margin line is polygon in the specified interval. The margin line follows the given curve in the specified interval.
POLYGON (x1,y1,z1), (x2,y2,z2),...; CURVE name
CURVE name/(x1,x2,...); Same as CURVE name; but the points are taken from the curve at x1, x2, ... OK; SKIP; Terminate definition and store the margin line. Terminate definition without storing the margin line.
10 Output functions
All the necessary calculations are performed in connection with the output commands; there are no separate calculation commands in CR. All the results which may be listed or plotted are stored in the run time memory of the task CR. The minimum GM and maximum KG limit curves are also stored permanently in the project data base. All results are also available as variables. The argument commands define the scope and contents of output and the calculation methods. The calculation and output arguments (exception loading conditions, initial conditions or damage cases) keep their values from run to run until they are changed; the user should check the arguments regularly. Each environment INTACT and DAMAGE has own set of arguments. The system provides a selection of standard lists and plots which are controlled by the quantity selection commands and the table and diagram output options. The user may produce his own lists and plots from the run time stored data or variables.
10.1 Arguments
All currently valid arguments are listed by the command ARG; Current value(s) of a single argument may be listed by the corresponding parameterless argument command. Provided CR is called from the task level, one may change the working environment from intact stability to damage stability and vice versa. The environment intact stability, INTACT, is initiated when CR is called from the task level. The environment is changed to damage stability by ENV DAMAGE; and the environment is changed back to intact stability by
42 (169)
ENV INTACT; Changing of the environment is not possible if CR is called from the subsystems LD or DA. The command without parameters shows the selected environment. One can see the environment also from the prompt of CR: CR. in the environment INTACT and CR. in the environment DAMAGE. The commands RCR and ICR handle the set of relevant criteria. The set of relevant criteria is formed by RCR crit,crit,...; where crit is the name of a criterion, or criterion group, or ALL, which means that all defined criteria are relevant. The command without parameters lists the current selection. Note that the criteria and criterion groups must be defined in that environment they will be used. Criteria are removed from the set by ICR crit,crit,...; where crit is the name of a criterion, or criterion group, or ALL, which means that all criteria are irrelevant. In the environment INTACT, the set of loading conditions of LD, which is investigated, is selected by the command LOAD cond,cond,...; where cond is the name of a loading condition defined in LD or NONE which means that the selection is empty. The command without parameters lists the current selection. In the environment DAMAGE, this command also selects loading conditions but they are used for marking loading conditions to the limit curve drawings, not for calculation. See the command INIT for selecting initial conditions (loading conditions) for calculation in the environment DAMAGE. When referring to a loading case in the arguments, MODE FREE and FRS 'ALL REAL' are automatically used in the calculation. Note that this applies only if the environment DAMAGE is active, or if the program for some reason does calculations in the damage task, e.g. if ENV is INTACT and MODE STEP is set, then the GZ curve for loading conditions is calculated with MODE FREE and FRS 'ALL REAL'. Otherwise the GZ curve is taken directly AS IS from the loading condition results. In the environment DAMAGE, the calculation cases from which output lists and plots are produced are generated by combining the given initial conditions with the given damage cases (as done in DA giving the parameter 'inits/damages' in the calculation, listing and plotting commands). The initial conditions are selected by the command INIT cond,cond,...; where cond is name of an initial condition or initial condition group defined in DA. The command alternatives INIT NONE; or INIT -; make the set empty. The empty set is needed if local initial conditions are used instead of initial conditions of DA. The damage cases are selected by the command DAM case,case,...; where case is name of a damage case or damage case group defined in DA. The command alternatives DAM NONE; or DAM -; make the set empty.
43 (169)
If one wants to make lists and plots for a set of local loading or initial conditions, the calculation arguments HULL (calculation hull), T (draughts), TR (trims), GM, HEEL (calculation heeling angles) and RHO (seawater density) are needed for defining of the local loading conditions and assigning the arguments for calculation: HULL name; calculation hull; default = stability hull from the reference system in the environment INTACT and damage hull from the reference system in the environment DAMAGE. dra ughts (m) in the NAPA standard format, default = (0.6*TDWL,1.1*TDWL,0.1*TDWL) trims (m) in the NAPA standard format, default = 0.0 heeling angles in the NAPA standard format (deg) GM (m) for the local loading conditions. Values for draughts t1,t2,... are fetched from the curve by linear interpolation. GM of the first or last point is used for the draughts outside the curve. If GM is constant, only one value 'GM gm' is needed. Default 0.15 m seawater density (t/m3).
T t1,t2,...; TR tr1,tr2,...; HEEL a1,a2,...; GM t,gm,t,gm,...
RHO r;
Note that all kinds of output are possible for the local loading conditions and local initial conditions, their use is not limited to the calculation of the limit curves only. The commands ROP and IRO handle the set of relevant openings, i.e. the set of openings which contribute to downflooding. The set of relevant openings is formed by ROP ope,ope,...; where ope is name of an opening or ALL which means that all openings are relevant. The command without parameters lists the current selection. Openings are removed from the set by IRO ope,ope,...; where ope is name of an opening or ALL which means that all openings are irrelevant. The current freeboard deck edge is selected by the command CFRB edge; where 'edge' is the name of the freeboard deck edge defined by the command FRB, or 'edge' is of the form 'H=h' in which case a height approximation is used instead of the curve. The height approximation is equal to the point at the mid frame at the height h (m). The alternative CFRB OFF; cancels the selection. The command without parameters lists the current selection. The current margin line is selected by the command CMARG name; where 'name' is the name of the margin line defined by the command MARG. The alternative CMARG -; cancels the selection. The command without parameters lists the current selection. The bilge line is selected by the command CBILGE bilge; where 'bilge' is the name of the bilge line defined by the command BILGE, or 'bilge' is of the form 'TG=tg' in which case a tangent approximation is used instead of the curve, or 'bilge' is of the form 'POS=(x,y,z)' in which case a point
44 (169)
approximation is used instead of the curve. The tangent approximation is equal to the point where the tangent of the mid frame makes an angle of tg degrees with the y-axis. The point approximation is equal to the given point. The alternative CBILGE OFF; cancels the selection. The command without parameters lists the current selection. The commands RPO and IPO handle the set of relevant special points. The set of relevant special points is formed by RPO point,point,...; where point is the name of a special point or ALL which means that all points are relevant. The command without parameters lists the current selection. Points are removed from the set by IPO point,point,...; where point is the name of a special point or ALL which means that all points are irrelevant. The mode, how to calculate the GZ curves for the local loading conditions or damage cases, is selected by the command MODE. In the environment INTACT, there are eleven alternatives of the calculation mode: the ship is let trim freely (default) FREE FIX STEP the ship is kept in even keel during GZ calculation steps occur at angles of downflooding. Steps may occur in the GZ curve due to downflooding provided there are, among relevant openings, unprotected or weathertight openings which lead from the sea to compartments inside the watertight hull. The mode STEP implies always the mode FREE, i.e. the stepped curve is not possible to calculate in the fixed trim mode. Note! also the loading conditions from LD are recalculated in the STEP mode (exception of the rule that arg. do not affect on conditions from LD). there are no steps due to downflooding (default) transverse center of gravity is at 0.0, i.e. asymmetric hull can be seen in GZ curves (default) transverse center of gravity is at TCB, i.e. there is no steady heeling due to asymmetric hull. the ship is forced to list to the starboard side the ship is forced to list to the port side the program selects the listing side automaticly depending on the relative position of the center of gravity and center of buoyancy in the upright (default). treat GZ-curves by the constant displacement method. The constant displacement method differs from the variable displacement method only if the STEP mode is on and downflooding takes place to a room having liquid load (see the documents of damage stability). treat GZ-curves by the variable displacement method (see CDISP).
NOSTEP TCG0 TCGB SB PS AUTO CDISP
VDISP
In the environment DAMAGE, there are nine alternatives of the calculation mode: CDISP VDISP STEP treat GZ-curves by the constant displacement method reat GZ-curves by the variable displacement method steps occur at angles of downflooding, i.e. the flooding stage PROGRESSIVE will be calculated (OPT PROGRESSIVE in damage stability)
45 (169)
NOSTEP PERM NOPERM SB PS AUTO
there are no steps due to downflooding replace steel reductions of damaged liquid load rooms by permeabilities in flooded conditions do not replace steel reductions of damaged liquid load rooms by permeabilities in flooded conditions the ship is forced to list to the starboard side the ship is forced to list to the port side the program selects the listing side automaticly depending on the relative position of the center of gravity and center of buoyancy in the upright or, if the range of calculation heeling angles extends from the negative side to the positive side, both PS and SB sides are calculated.
The command has the form MODE mode,mode,...; where mode is one of the alternatives from the lists above. Note that, in the environment INTACT, this command has no effect on the loading conditions fetched from LD; selection of the calculation mode happens in LD (exception STEP). In the environment DAMAGE, if a damage case is already calculated in the subsystem DA but some calculation mode assigned in CR differs from that used in DA, the case will be recalculated. The minimum GM (max. KG) which is in compliance with the criterion is calculated by an iterative method. Iteration is terminated if the iteration step of GM is less than the tolerance (default 5 mm) or the difference between the required and attained value is less than the tolerance which depends on quantity (default for metric quantities 1 mm, for angle quantities 0.1 deg, for area quantities 0.0001 mrad and for area ratio quantities 0.01 = 1 %). By the command ITOL alt=tol, alt=tol,...; one can change the tolerancies. There are five alternatives for alt=tol: GM=tol : M=tol : DEG=tol : MRAD=tol : RATIO=tol: tolerance for the iteration step of GM (m), tolerance for the difference of the metric quantities (m), tolerance for the difference of the angle quantities (deg), tolerance for the difference of the area quantities (m*rad), tolerance for the difference of the area ratio quantities.
If some of the tolerancies M=tol, DEG=tol, MRAD=tol or RATIO=tol has never been given explicitly and one changes the tolerance for the iteration step of GM, the other tolerancies follow the GM-tolerance in the following way: tol = gmtol/5 for the metric quantities, tol = 20*gmtol for the angle quantities, tol = gmtol/50 for the area quantities and tol = 2*gmtol for the area ratio quantities. To prevent endless loops, the maximum number of iterations in calculation of the minimum GM and maximum KG is limited to 100. The number of iterations may be changed by the command NITER n; More iterations may be necessary if the tolerancies are very small. The profile is used in calculation of the lateral area for the wind moments and for one alternative of the criterion MINGM. The name of the default profile curve is fetched from the reference system, or it may be given by the command PROF (curve,curve,...) NOCL; where 'curve' is the name of the curve forming one part of the profile. If there is only one part (one name within parentheses) the parentheses may be omitted. The profile given explicitly in the definition of the moment curve, overrules the default one.
46 (169)
The option NOCL has effect only if there are container loads. The lateral area of containers is automaticly added to the lateral profile area. However, if the containers are already included in the profile curve, their area is taken twice if the automatic adding is not prevented. The option NOCL causes that the containers are not added to the lateral area, the profile is treated as such. Wind model may be used instead of PROF in moment calculations. The difference between the profile and wind model is that the first one is two-dimensional and second one is three-dimensional model of area exposed to the wind. In the twodimensional model, the projected area exposed to the wind and the lateral area of the water resistance varies according to draught and trim only while, in the three-dimensional model, the areas vary according to draught, trim, heel, azimuth and wind direction. Both arguments are used in the same way in the same connections but only one may be active at a time; if wind model is given, profile is ignored and vice versa. The argument command WMOD name dir takes a wind model in use. 'name' is name of a table defining the wind model. The table should have the columns NAME, COEF and SIDE. The column NAME contains the names of surfaces of the model and the column COEF contains corresponding shape coefficients. The column SIDE tells which one side of the surface is exposed to the wind. The alternatives are O = outside, I = inside and B = both sides. B should be used for surfaces having no volume and which are exposed to the wind on both sides. The default side may be given by quantity SIDE: QNT SIDE s. If this is mi ssing, the program default is O. The default direction of wind relative to the floating structure is perpendicular to the stability axis. One may fix the wind direction by the option 'dir'. If the option is given, the wind makes an angle 'dir' with the y-axis of the structure so that if dir=0, wind blows from the -y-axis and 'dir' grows towards the +x-axis. Note that, if 'dir' and the stability axis are parallel, the resulting moment is zero. In connection with wind models, the option FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) is accepted by the commands: LIST PROF ASG PROF FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim)
LIST DPROF FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) ASG DPROF FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim)
The commands give values that are calculated for the structure exposed to the wind from the direction 'dir' and floating in the stated position. Plotting of wind model is not available in CR but it should be done in DR-task. The turning moment calculations need to know the speed of the ship; service speed for IMO and full speed for USSR. The default value for the service speed is taken from the reference system and the default full speed is 1.25*service speed. By the command VS v; one can change the default service speed (v in m/s) and by the command VF v; the default full speed is changed (v in m/s). The speed given explicitly in the moment definitions overrules these data. The default value for the number of passengers is got from the reference system or it is given by the command NPASS n; This data is needed in the calculation of the moment caused by crowding of passengers. The number given explicitly in the moment definition overrules this data. Contents of the lists is controlled by the command LQ. There are ten different list types which are controlled by LQ:
47 (169)
Name of list
LQ (subject) Description ENV INT ENV DA LIM CRT LDT MGM SUMM ROP FRB MRG POI PRO DLIM DCRT DLDT DMGM DSUM DROP DFRB DMRG DPOI DPRO GM or KG limit curve Criterion table Loading condition table Min. GM's in compliance with crit. Two dim. summary table Relevant openings Freeboard Margin line Special points Lateral profile
LIMCURVE CRTABLE LDTABLE MGMTABLE SUMTABLE OPENINGS FRB MARGIN POINTS PROFILE
The available quantities are listed in connection with each listing command. See the documents of the MONITOR subsystem for more information about LQ and table output options TOO. Contents of the plots is controlled by the command PQ. There are five different list types which are controlled by PQ: Name of plot PQ (subject) Description ENV INT ENV DA LIM LDC CRC MGM PRO DLIM DCRC DMGM DPRO GM or KG limit curve Loading condition check plot Criterion check plot Minimum GM check plot Lateral profile check plot
LIMCURVE LDCHECK CRCHECK MGMCHECK PROFILE
The available quantities are listed in connection with each plotting command. See the documents of the MONITOR subsystem for more information about PQ and table output options POO. Note concerning the environment DAMAGE: The LQ's, TOO's, PQ's and POO's of CR are available also in DA. The selection made in DA will be copied to CR if CR is called from DA by a lisling command, plotting command or by the command CR.
10.2 Listing
Every LIST-command generates a data description in the run time memory which has the same name (receded by RES*) and contents as the list. This data description may be used for producing own lists by macros. To every LIST-command corresponds an ASG-command, which creates a set of variables equivalent to the contents of the data description generated by listing. If one wants to generate only the data description without making a list or assigning variables, the command CALC may be used. The command CALC is also suitable for forced recalculation of results. The names of the standard lists may be shortened as much as they remain unambiguous. The standard lists are produced by the LIST-commands described in the following chapters. 10.2.1 GM and KG limit curves In the environment INTACT, the command LIST LIM NOHEADER, tab-opt; and in the environment DAMAGE, the command
48 (169)
LIST DLIM init/dam NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; lists a table showing the minimum GM and maximum KG limit curves as functions of draught or trim. The table could look like for example: T x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx TR x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx Min.GM x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx Max.KG xx.xxx xx.xxx xx.xxx xx.xxx Det.cri. aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa
The following quantities are available in the environment INTACT by LQ LIM: QUANTITY T TR MINGM MAXKG DCRI DESCRIPTION draught trim minimum GM in compliance with the criteria maximum KG in compliance with the criteria name of the determining criterion
The following quantities are available in the environment DAMAGE by LQ DLIM: QUANTITY T TR MINGM MAXKG MINGMO MAXKGO DESCRIPTION draught of the initial condition trim of the initial condition for the selected set of damage cases, mnimum corrected GM in intact cond. which is in compliance with the criteria for the selected set of damage cases, maximum corrected KG in intact cond. which is in compliance with the criteria for the selected set of damage cases, minimum uncorrected GM in intact cond. which is in compliance with the criteria for the selected set of damage cases, maximum uncorrected KG in intact cond. which is in compliance with the criteria name of the determining criterion name of the determining damage case
DCRI DAM
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. The option INTACT causes that the limiting GM or KG values of the intact conditions contribute to the limit curves (the environment DAMAGE only). The options tab-opt are normal table output options. Note that this listing function is possible only for local loading conditions in the environment INTACT.
49 (169)
10.2.2 Criterion table In the environment INTACT, the command LIST CRT, NOHEADER, tab-opt; lists, for every selected loading condition, a table which could look like for example: Loading condition xxxxxx Crit. aaaa bbbb cccc Descr. txtxtxt txtxtxt txtxtxt Req. Att. Unit u u u Status OK OK NOT MET Min. GM x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx Max. KG x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx
x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx
The following quantities are available by LQ CRT: QUANTITY RCR TEXT REQ ATTV UNIT STAT MINGM MAXKG DESCRIPTION name of relevant criterion descriptive text of the criterion requirement set by the criterion attained value corresp. to the criterion unit of requirement and att. value status indicating whether criterion met or not min. GM which is in compliance with crit. max. KG which is in compliance with crit.
There are as many tables as there are selected loading conditions by the LOAD-command. If there is no loading condition selected like this, the loading conditions defined by T and TR are used. In the environment DAMAGE, the command LIST DCRT init/dam, NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; lists data about the relevant criteria as function of initial conditions, damage cases, damage stages, damage phases and heeling sides. The following quantities are available by LQ DCRT: QUANTITY DAM INIT STAGE PHASE SIDE RCR TEXT REQ ATTIV DESCRIPTION name of damage case name of initial condition stage of damage case phase of damage case listing side PS/SB name of relevant criterion descriptive text of the criterion requirement set by the criterion attained value corresp. to the criterion
50 (169)
UNIT STAT MINGM MAXKG MINGMO MAXKGO
unit of requirement and att. value status indicating whether criterion met or not min. corrected GM which is in compliance with crit. max. corrected KG which is in compliance with crit. min. uncorrected GM which is in compliance with crit. max. uncorrected KG which is in compliance with crit.
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. The option INTACT adds results of the intact ship to the list (stage INTACT in the list). The options tab-opt are normal table output options. This is the default list which is got by the command LIST without parameters. 10.2.3 Loading condition table In the environment INTACT, the command LIST LDT, NOHEADER, tab-opt; and in the environment DAMAGE, the command LIST DLDT init/dam, NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; lists a table which could look like for example:
Load xxxxx yyyyy zzzzz
Description txtxtx txtxtx txtxtx
Det.cri aaaa aaaa aaaa
Req. x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx
Attained x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx
Unit u u u
Status OK OK NOT MET
In the environment INTACT, the following quantities are available by LQ LDT: QUANTITY LCOND TEXT DCRI REQ ATTV UNIT STAT DESCRIPTION name of loading condition descriptive text of the loading condtition determining criterion requirement set by the determining criterion attained value corresp. to the determining criterion unit of requirement and attained value statuts indicator
In the environment DAMAGE, the following quantities are available by LQ DLDT: QUANTITY LCOND DESCRIPTION name of loading condition
51 (169)
TEXT DCRI DAM STAGE PHASE SIDE REQ ATTV UNIT STAT
descriptive text of the loading condtition determining criterion determining damage case determining damage stage determining damage phase determining listing side PS/SB requirement set by the determining criterion attained value corresp. to the determining criterion unit of requirement and attained value statuts indicator
What criterion and case is determining, i.e. the most critical, is more or less matter of opinion. The program selects the most critical criterion and case in the following way: if there are criteria which are not met, the most critical is that which is relatively furthest below the requirement, i.e. the value (att-req)/req is the least; if all criteria are met, the most critical is that which is the closest to the requirement, i.e. the value (att-req)*req is the least. Note that the criteria having smaller requirements are more weighted than the criteria with greater requirements. In the equation (att-req)*req, the quantities with different units are scaled so that 1 deg corresponds to 1 cm corresponds to 0.0001 m*rad corresponds to 1 % (dimensionless = area ratio quantities). The criticality of the criteria measured by the minimum GM (maximum KG) values, is got by LIS MGM. In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT takes the intact condition into account in selecting the determining criterion and case. The options tab-opt are normal table output options. 10.2.4 Minimum GM and maximum KG table In the environment INTACT, the command LIST MGM, NOHEADER, tab-opt; and in the environment DAMAGE, the command LIST DMGM init/dam, NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; lists a table showing the minimum GM and maximum KG values which are in compliance with the relevant criteria. The table could look like for example:
Load xxxxx yyyyy zzzzz
T x.xx x.xx x.xx
Trim x.xx x.xx x.xx
Min.GM x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx
Max.KG xx.xxx xx.xxx xx.xxx
Det.cri. Req. aaaaa bbbbb ccccc
Att.
Unit u u u
x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx
In the environment INTACT, the following quantities are available by LQ MGM: QUANTITY LCOND DESCRIPTION name of the loading condition
52 (169)
T TR MINGM MAXKG DCRI REQ ATTV UNIT
draught of the loading condition trim of the loading condition minimum GM in compliance with criteria maximum KG in compliance with criteria determining criterion requirement set by the determining crit. attained value corresp. to the determining criterion and min. GM (max. KG). unit of requirement and attained value
In the environment DAMAGE, the following quantities are available by LQ DMGM: QUANTITY INIT T TR DAM STAGE PHASE SIDE MINGM MAXKG MINGMO MAXKGO DCRI REQ ATTIV UNIT DESCRIPTION name of initial condition draught of the initial condition trim of the initial condition name of the determining damage case determining damage stage determining damage phase determining listing side PS/SB min. corrected GM in compliance with criteria max. corrected KG in compliance with criteria min. uncorrected GM in compliance with criteria max. uncorrected KG in compliance with criteria determining criterion requirement set by the determining criterion attained value corresp. to the determining criterion and min. GM (max. KG) unit of requirement and attained value
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT adds to the list the results of the intact ship. The options tab-opt are normal table output options. 10.2.5 Summary list In the environment INTACT, the command LIST SUMM arg1,arg2 NOHEADER; and in the environment DAMAGE, the command LIST DSUM init/dam, arg1,arg2 NOHEADER, INTACT;
53 (169)
makes two dimensional summary lists, i.e. lists in which one quantity at a time is shown as function of two arguments. The quantities are selected in the environment INTACT by LQ SUMM and in the environment DAMAGE by LQ DSUM. The arguments are selected by the optional parameters 'arg1,arg2', where arg1 is for rows and arg2 is for columns. In both environment, the possible argument pairs are the following: LOAD,CRIT CRIT,LOAD T,CRIT CRIT,T : TR,CRIT : CRIT,TR T,TR TR,T quantities are as function of loading condition (initial condition) and criterion as above but rows and columns interchanged quantities are as function of draught and criterion as above but rows and columns interchanged quantities are as function of trim and criterion as above but rows and columns interchanged quantities are as function of draught and trim as above but rows and columns interchanged.
Additionally, in the environment DAMAGE, the following pairs are available: LOAD,DAM DAM,LOAD DAM,T T,DAM DAM,TR TR,DAM DAM,CRIT CRIT,DAM quantities are as function of loading condition (initial condition) and damage case as above but rows and columns interchanged quantities are as function of damage case and draught as above but rows and columns interchanged quantities are as function of damage case and trim as above but rows and columns interchanged quantities are as function of damage case and criterion as above but rows and columns interchanged.
If the argument selection 'arg1,arg2' is missing, the program makes the selection according to the current calculation arguments LOADS, T and TR in the following way:
s
s s s
if there are selected loading conditions from LD (arg. LOAD)or initial conditions from DA (arg. INIT),the selection is LOAD,CRIT if number of selected loading conditions is zero andnumber of trims is one (arg. TR), the selection is T,CRIT if number of selected loading conditions is zero andnumber of draughts is one (arg. T), the selection is TR,CRIT if number of selected loading conditions is zero andnumber of draughts and number of trims is greater than one, the selection is T,TR.
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT takes into account contribution of the minimum GM and maximum KG values of the initial conditions. 10.2.6 GZ Curves The output function 'LIST GZ' lists the stability curve and other functions of heel for the cases given in the arguments. The syntax of the command is: LIST GZC MOM=name CRIT=name tab-opt
54 (169)
where the options 'MOM=name' and 'CRIT=name' select the moment (like in the command 'PLD LDC') and 'tab-opt' are standard table output options. The available quantities are: QUANTITY GZ MOM T TR MS EPHI AGZ RESFLD RESFRB RESMRG RESUNFL RESWEFL TRX TRA TRXA HEELX The quantities are selected by 'LQ GZC'. 10.2.7 Openings In the environment INTACT, the command LIST ROP, NOHEADER, tab-opt; and in the environment DAMAGE, the command LIST DROP init/dam, NOHEADER, INTACT, MAX=nr, tab-opt; lists a table showing quantities related to the relevant openings. The table looks like for example: Ope aaa aaa aaa Descr. x y z Type Imm.a Res. Red/deg x.x x.x x.x x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx x.xx Connect xxx, xxx xxx, xxx xxx, xxx DESCRIPTION righting lever (m) moment (tm) draught (m) trim along stability axis (m) residuary stability lever (m) dynamic stability lever (mrad) area of positive part of GZ curve (mrad) reserve to downflooding (unprotected and weathertight openings) (m) reserve to immersion of freeboard deck edge (m) reserve to immersion of margin line (m) reserve to downflooding (unprotected openings) (m) reserve to downflooding (weathertight openings) (m) trim along x-axis (m) trim angle along stability axis (deg) trim angle along x-axis (deg) heel angle around x-axis
txtxt xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xxxx txtxt xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xxxx txtxt xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xxxx
In the environment INTACT, the following quantities are available by LQ ROP: QUANTITY OPEN TEXT DESCRIPTION name of the opening description of the opening
55 (169)
X Y Z OTYPE IMMA IMMR REDPD CONN
x-coordinate of the opening y-coordinate of the opening z-coordinate of the opening type of the opening immersion angle of the opening reserve to immersion reduction per one degree of heeling comp. connected by the opening
In the environment DAMAGE, the following quantities are available by LQ DROP: QUANTITY DAM INIT STAGE PHASE SIDE OPEN TEXT X Y Z OTYPE IMMA IMMR REDPD CONN DESCRIPTION damage case initial condition damage stage damage phase listing side PS/SB name of the opening description of the opening x-coordinate of the opening y-coordinate of the opening z-coordinate of the opening type of the opening immersion angle of the opening reserve to immersion reduction per one degree of heeling comp. connected by the opening
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT adds to the list results of the intact conditions. In the environment DAMAGE, the option MAX=nr restricts the number of openings to the nr most critical. The lesser angle of immersion, the more critical opening. The options tab-opt are normal table output options. In the environment INTACT, there are as many tables as there are selected loading conditions. 10.2.8 Freeboard In the environment INTACT, the command LIST FRB, NOHEADER, tab-opt;
56 (169)
and in the environment DAMAGE, the command LIST DFRB init/dam, NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; lists a table showing quantities related to the freeboard. The table looks like for example: Load Descr. Freebrd aaaa txtxt aaaa txtxt aaaa txtxt x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx xfrb xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx yfrb xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx zfrb xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx Imm.a xx.x xx.x xx.x ximm xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx Red/deg x.xx x.xx x.xx
In the environment INTACT, the following quantities are available by LQ FRB: QUANTITY LDCOND TEXT FRB XFRB YFRB ZFRB IMMA XIMM REDPD DESCRIPTION name of loading condition description of loading condition freeboard calc. at the steady equilibrium x-coordinate where the min. dist. from wl y-coordinate corresponding x z-coordinate corresponding x immersion angle of the freeboard deck edge x where the frb deck edge first immerses reduction per one degree of heeling
In the environment DAMAGE, the following quantities are available by LQ DFRB: QUANTITY INIT DAM STAGE PHASE SIDE FRB XFRB YFRB ZFRB IMMA XIMM REDPD T TR DESCRIPTION name of initial condition name of damage case stage of damage phase of damage listing side PS/SB freeboard calc. at the steady equilibrium x-coordinate where the min. dist. from wl y-coordinate corresponding x z-coordinate corresponding x immersion angle of the freeboard deck edge x where the frb deck edge first immerses reduction per one degree of heeling draught of the case trim of the case
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM.
57 (169)
The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT adds to the list results of the intact conditions. The options tab-opt are normal table output options. 10.2.9 Margin line In the environment INTACT, the command LIST MRG, NOHEADER, tab-opt; and in the environment DAMAGE, the command LIST DMRG init/dam, NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; lists a table showing quantities related to the margin line. The table looks like for example: Load Descr. aaaa txtxt aaaa txtxt aaaa txtxt Res. x.xxx x.xxx x.xxx x xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx y xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx z xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx Imm.a xx.x xx.x xx.x ximm xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx Red/deg x.xx x.xx x.xx
In the environment INTACT, the following quantities are available by LQ MRG: QUANTITY LDCOND TEXT RES X Y Z IMMA XIMM REDPD DESCRIPTION name of loading condition description of loading condition reserve to immersion of the margin line x-coordinate where the min. dist. from wl y-coordinate corresponding x z-coordinate corresponding x immersion angle of the margin line x where the margin line first immerses reduction per one degree of heeling
In the environment DAMAGE, the following quantities are available by LQ DMRG: QUANTITY INIT DAM STAGE PHASE SIDE RES X Y Z DESCRIPTION name of initial condition name of damage case damage stage damage phase listing side PS/SB reserve to immersion of the margin line x-coordinate where the min. dist. from wl y-coordinate corresponding x z-coordinate corresponding x
58 (169)
IMMA XIMM REDPD
immersion angle of the margin line x where the margin line first immerses reduction per one degree of heeling
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT adds to the list results of the intact conditions. The options tab-opt are normal table output options. 10.2.10 Special points In the environment INTACT, the command LIST POI, NOHEADER, tab-opt; and in the environment DAMAGE, the command LIST DPOI init/dam, NOHEADER, INTACT, MAX=nr, tab-opt; lists a table showing quantities related to the special points. The table looks like for example: Point aaaa aaaa aaaa Descr. txtxt txtxt txtxt x y z Imm.a x.x x.x x.x Res. x.xx x.xx x.xx Red/deg x.xx x.xx x.xx
xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx
In the environment INTACT, the following quantities are available by LQ POI: QUANTITY NAME TEXT X Y Z IMMA IMMR REDPD DESCRIPTION name of point description of point x-coordinate of point y-coordinate of point z-coordinate of point immersion angle of point reserve to immersion reduction per one degree of heeling
In the environment DAMAGE, the following quantities are available by LQ DPOI: QUANTITY INIT DAM STAGE PHASE SIDE DESCRIPTION name of initial condition name of damage case damage stage damage phase listing side PS/SB
59 (169)
NAME TEXT X Y Z IMMA IMMR REDPD
name of point description of point x-coordinate of point y-coordinate of point z-coordinate of point immersion angle of point reserve to immersion reduction per one degree of heeling
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT adds to the list results of the intact conditions. In the environment DAMAGE, the option MAX=nr restricts the number of points to the nr most critical. The lesser angle of immersion, the more critical point. The options tab-opt are normal table output options. In the environment INTACT, there are as many tables as there are selected loading conditions. The option CUR=name(x-coord) (a special option for LIST DPOI) intersect curve at given x-coordinates, generate special points at the intersection points and add them to listing.
s s
name: the name of a geometric curve or a freeboard deck edge x-coord: x-coordinates where to intersect the curve. There are three ways to give coordinates:
s s s
x1, x2, x3,...explicit set D=step, equally spaced values over the x-range of the curve xarr, values provided by a calculator array.
10.2.11 Lateral profile In the environment INTACT, the commands LIST PROF, NOHEADER, tab-opt; LIST PROF, MOM=name, NOHEADER, tab-opt; LIST PROF, CRIT=name, NOHEADER, tab-opt; and in the environment DAMAGE, the commands LIST DPROF init/dam, NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; LIST DPROF init/dam, MOM=name, NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; LIST DPROF init/dam, CRIT=name, NOHEADER, INTACT, tab-opt; list a table showing quantities related to the lateral profile. In the environment INTACT, the following quantities are available by LQ PRO: QUANTITY LCOND PROF DESCRIPTION name of loading condition name of lateral profile curve (part)
60 (169)
COEF PA PAA PAU PAZ PAAZ PAUZ PMCG PMTP2
weighting coefficient of profile curve (part) total area of lateral profile area of lateral profile above wl area of lateral profile under wl vertical center of area of total lateral profile vertical center of area of lateral profile above wl vertical center of area of lateral profile under wl moment of area from the center of underwater part moment of area from the half draught
In the environment DAMAGE, the following quantities are available by LQ DPRO: QUANTITY INIT DAM STAGE PHASE SIDE PROF COEF PA PAA PAU PAZ PAAZ PAUZ PMCG PMTP2 DESCRIPTION name of initial condition name of damage case damage stage damage phase listing side PS/SB name of lateral profile curve (part) weighting coefficient of profile curve (part) total area of lateral profile area of lateral profile above wl area of lateral profile under wl vertical center of area of total lateral profile vertical center of area of lateral profile above wl vertical center of area of lateral profile under wl moment of area from the center of underwater part moment of area from the half draught
In the environment DAMAGE, the option init/dam selects the calculation cases about which data is listed. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments INIT and DAM. The results are listed for the profile given in the arguments unless the option MOM=name or CRIT=name is given. If MOM=name or CRIT=name is given, the profile used is that specified in the definition data of the given moment or criterion. The option NOHEADER omits the general header lines. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT adds to the list results of the intact conditions. The options tab-opt are normal table output options. 10.2.12 Auxiliary listing commands The following commands are provided for modification of list output: TYPE text; Add the given text to the list. For more information see !EXPL TYPE/GEN.
61 (169)
LF n NP NL FIG * SIZE du dv pos; FIG name SIZE du dv pos; LQ TOO TAB
Add empty line(s) to the list. The option n gives the number of empty lines (default 1). For more info see !EXPL LF/GEN. Generate form feed (new page). Open new list. For more info see !EXPL NL/GEN. Insert figure into the list. The first alternative inserts the last plot made in CR and the second alternative inserts the named plot from the data base. For more information see !EXPL FIG/GEN. Select quantities. For more info see !EXPL LQ/GEN. Table output options. For more info see !EXPL TOO/GEN. Enter table calculation task (TAB).
10.3 Plotting
There are five standard plots produced by the CR subsystem: the minimum GM or maximum KG limit curve, the loading condition check plot (not available in the environment DAMAGE), the criterion check plot, the minimum GM check plot and the profile check plot. The plots are made using the general diagram output module. The quantities to be included are controlled with command PQ while the graphic result can be controlled with command POO. Calculation of missing data is carried out automatically; there is no need for separate calculation commands. The scope of plotting is controlled by the argument commands or command parameters. 10.3.1 Plotting according to macro The command PLOT .id initiates plotting according to a standard macro with name plotcr.id. The alternatives which are available are listed by PLOT .CAT, and the explanations, provided there is some stored with the macro, are got by PLOT .id ?. 10.3.2 Minimum GM and maximum KG limit curves In the environment INTACT, the command PLD LIM SEP DAM=dname NAME=name POO poopt and in the environment DAMAGE, the command PLD DLIM init/dam SEP=alt INLIM=iname NAME=name INTACT POO poopt draws the GM and/or KG limit curve(s) as function of draught, trim or displacement. The layout of the drawing looks like:
62 (169)
In the environment INTACT, the following quantities are available by PQ LIM: QUANTITY T TR DISP GMLIMIN KGLIMIN KMT GMLIMDA KGLIMDA GM0LIMDA KG0LIMDA GM KG LCOND DESCRIPTION draught (argument quantity) tirm (argument quantity) displacement (argument quantity) min. GM in compliance with intact criteria max. KG in compliance with intact criteria KMT of the ship min. corr. GM from the stated lim. curve of DA max. corr. KG from the stated lim. curve of DA min. uncorr. GM from the stated lim. curve of DA max. uncorr. KG from the stated lim. curve of DA GM of loading condition to be marked KG of loading condition to be marked loading condition to be marked
In the environment DAMAGE, the following quantities are available by PQ DLIM: QUANTITY T TR DISP GMLIMDA KGLIMDA GM0LIMDA KG0LIMDA KMT GMLIMIN DESCRIPTION draught (argument quantity) tirm (argument quantity) displacement (argument quantity) min. corr. GM in compliance with damage criteria max. corr. KG in compliance with damage criteria min. uncorr. GM in compliance with damage criteria max. uncorr. KG in compliance with damage criteria KMT of the ship min. GM from the stated intact lim. curve
63 (169)
KGLIMIN GM KG LCOND
max. KG from the stated intact lim. curve GM of loading condition to be marked KG of loading condition to be marked loading condition to be marked
The quantities T, TR and DISP are available as arguments. The quantities GMLIMIN, KGLIMIN, GMLIMDA, KGLIMDA, GM0LIMDA, KG0LIMDA and KMT produce curves into the drawing. The quantities GM, KG and LCOND are available for marking loading conditions in the drawing. The marking symbol is selected by the POO-option MARK, drawing a line through the marking points is prevented by the POO-option NOMARK and names are connected to the marks by the POO-option TAG. See the following figure as an example of marking.
In the environment DAMAGE, the cases (initial conditions and damage cases for limit curve generation) are fetched from the arguments INIT and DAM unless the optional parameter init/dam is given. The option SEP draws a set of limit curves instead of one combined limit curve (default). The option has three forms (only the first one is available in the environment INTACT): SEP draw all curves separately. In the environment INTACT this means one curve per relevant criterion. In the environment DAMAGE this means one curve per each combination of criterion, damage case, stage, phase and side. (in the environment DAMAGE only) draw curves separately so that there is one combined curve per damage case. (in the environment DAMAGE only) draw curves separately so that there is one combined curve per criterion.
SEP=DAM SEP=CRI
The following figure shows an example about curves drawn separately.
64 (169)
The options DAM=dname and INLIM=iname adds to the drawing a limit curve (limit curves) from the different environment provided the corresponding quantities are selected by PQ. The option DAM=dname is used in the environment INTACT and it adds to the drawing the specified limit curve of damage stability (=environment DAMAGE). The option INLIM=iname is used in the environment DAMAGE and it adds to the drawing the specified limit curve of intact stability (=environment INTACT). The option NAME=name stores the produced limit curve in the data base unit 4 under the given name. If this option is missing, the following names are used in storing: in the environment INTACT GM/KG-LIM.T if argument is T or DISP and GM/KG-LIM.TR if argument is TR; in the environment DAMAGE GM/KG-DALIM.T if argument is T or DISP and GM/KG-DALIM.TR if argument is TR. In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT takes the contribution of the intact conditions into account in calculation of the minimum GM and maximum KG. The delimiter POO is needed if plot output options follow. The options poopt are standard plot output options replacing those given with the command POO. 10.3.3 Loading condition check plot The loading condition check plot shows the stability curves of the loading condition. This plot is available in the environment INTACT only. The command PLD LDC MOM=name CRIT=name MAXNR=nr POO poopt; produces the loading condition check plot. The following quantities are available by PQ LCD: QUANTITY HEEL GZ EPHI MOM GM RESFLD RESFRB RESUNFL DESCRIPTION heeling angle (argument) righting lever dynamic stability arm e(phi) moment arm line showing GM reserve to downflooding (unprot. and weathertight) reserve to immersion of frb deck edge reserve to unprotected flooding
65 (169)
RESWEFL RESMRG
reserve to flooding of weathertight openings reserve to immersion of margin line
The option MOM=name adds the moment curve to the diagram provided the corresponding quantity is selected. Note that the moment curve is available only if it is calculated in the same run, i.e. it appears in some currently relevant criterion. Default none. The option CRIT=name is same as MOM=name but the moment is given by the name of criterion where it appears. The option MAXNR=nr is the maximum number of the most critical openings shown in the drawing. Default all. The delimiter POO needed if plot output options follow. The options poopt are standard plot output options replacing those given with the command POO. 10.3.4 Criterion check plot The criterion check plot draws, the stability curves as basis, the quantity related to the criterion. How the quantity is marked in the drawing is selected by the plotting instructions given in the definition data of the criterion or by the command parameters. In the environment INTACT, the command PLD CRC cri,cri...crt=(opt,opt...),crt=(opt,opt...)...POO poopt and in the environment DAMAGE, the command PLD DCRC init/dam INIT=ini,DAM=dam,STAGE=stg,PHASE=pha, SIDE=s,CRIT=(cri,cri...),crt=(opt,opt...)...POO poopt produces one or more criterion check plots. A check plot could look like for example:
In both environments, the following quantities are available, by PQ CRC in the environment INTACT and by PQ DCRC in the environment DAMAGE: QUANTITY HEEL GZ EPHI MOM GM DESCRIPTION heeling angle (argument) righting lever dynamic stability arm e(phi) moment arm line showing GM
66 (169)
RESFLD RESFRB RESUNFL RESWEFL RESMRG
reserve to downflooding (unprot. and weathertight) reserve to immersion of frb deck edge reserve to unprotected flooding reserve to flooding of weathertight openings reserve to immersion of margin line
In the environment DAMAGE, the cases (initial conditions and damage cases) are fetched from the arguments INIT and DAM unless the optional parameter init/dam is given. Normally, all initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phase and sides are plotted at the same time. The set of plots produced by one command can be limited by fixing the initial condition, damage case, stage, phase or side. If some argument is fixed, all plots correspond to the selected one. If all arguments are fixed, the command produces only one plot. Of course, the initial condition and damage case may be fixed to one by giving as argument only one initial condition or damage case. INIT=ini DAM=dam STAGE=stg PHASE=pha SIDE=s fix initial condition fix damage case fix stage, stage before flooding is called INTACT fix phase, end of stage is called EQ fix listing side, s=PS or SB.
The command plots one check plot for each relevant criterion. The set of criteria to be plotted in one command may be limited by giving the names of criteria. In the environment INTACT, the form PLD CRC cri,cri... plots only the given criteria. In the environment DAMAGE, the option CRIT=(cri,cri,..) or CRIT=cri restricts the set to the given ones. The option crt=(opt,opt...) controls how plot criterion dependent markings. These options overrule the control data given in the definition of criteria. There is always a default way to plot extra markings if instructions are missing. Because additions depend on the type of the criterion, every criterion type has own set of options. The type of criterion 'crt' is one of the following alternatives: MAXGZ, MAXHEEL, MINAREA, MINGM, POSMAX, DOWNFLD, RANGE, VSTAB, RESFRB, RESMRG, RESFLD, ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN, DYNARM, GZRATIO. The options 'opt' must be selected from the following set: TH=h PEN=p HPEN=p ID=c ARROW U=u V=v FLL=c FLA=c FLB=c FLC=c IDA=c IDB=c text height of additional markings. Default that one selected by diagram plotting. select pen code for additions, p=logical pen code. Default P1011. select pen code for auxiliary lines (usually horizontal), p=logical pen code. Default P1011. control for (numeric) identification; c=ON, add standard identification (default); c=OFF, no identification; c='text', use the given text. draw pointers as arrows. Default bare line. horizontal coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. Default: line is vertical. vertical coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. raster code for area filling, c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'a', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'b', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'c', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. control for identification area 'a'. See ID= for alternatives. control for identification area 'b'. See ID= for alternatives.
67 (169)
IDC=c
control for identification area 'c'. See ID= for alternatives.
The following table shows the criterion types and the available options, + = available, - = not available.
TH PEN HPEN ID ARROW U V FLL FLA FLB FLC IDA IDB IDC IDC MAXGZ GZRATIO MAXHEEL MINAREA MINGM POSMAX DOWNFLD RANGE VSTAB RESFRB RESMRG RESFLD ARATIO1 ARATIO2 RESDYN DYNARM + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -
In the environment DAMAGE, the option INTACT adds plots of the initial conditions to the set of drawings. The delimiter POO needed if plot output options follow. The options poopt are standard plot output options replacing those given with command POO. The commands PLD CRC, PLD MGM, PLD DCRC and PLD DMGM assign two array variables: CRPLDSTR for strings and CRPLDVAL for numeric values. These variables are assigned automatically (ASG not needed) and the contents of the arrays is updated every time a new check plot is made. The variables are assigned for helping the user to add desired texts to the plots. The arrays contain following criterion depending data: CRPLDSTR elem. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. name of loading condition description of loading condition name of criterion description of criterion name of moment curve description of moment curve name of critical opening (immerses first) unit status (OK/NOT MET) name of damage case (in env. DAMAGE only) descr. of damage case (in env. DAMAGE only) stage of damage (in env. DAMAGE only) phase of stage (in env. DAMAGE only) side PS/SB (in env. DAMAGE only)
CRPLDVAL elem. 1. displacement (t)
68 (169)
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.
longitudinal center of buoyancy (m) transverse center of buoyancy (m) vertical center of buoyancy (m) longitudinal center of gravity (m) transverse center of gravity (m) vertical center of gravity (m) draught at upright position (m) trim at upright position (m) heeling angle (no moment) (deg) KMT (m) GM (m) draught at the steady heeling (no moment) (m) trim at the steady heeling (no moment) (m) lower limit of range defined by criterion (deg) upper limit of range defined by criterion (deg) rolling angle (mom. IMOWEATHER, USSRWEATHER) (deg) min. required GM (avail. if PLD MGM, DMGM) (m) requirement of the crit. (unit from CRPLDSTR(8)) attained value (unit from CRPLDSTR(8)) angle of downflooding (deg) immersion angle of the freeboard deck edge (deg) angle where the max. GZ (crit. MAXGZ) (deg) maximum GZ (crit. POSMAX) (m) lower limit of range (crit. RANGE) (deg) upper limit of range (crit. RANGE) (deg) steady heeling angle (zero moment) (deg) area 'a' (crit. ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN) (mrad) area 'b' (crit. ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN) (mrad) area 'c' (crit. ARATIO2) (mrad)
10.3.5 Minimum GM check plot The minimum GM check plot is similar to criterion check plot, but it is based on the GZ curve drawn for the minimum GM which is in compliance with the criterion. In the environment INTACT, the command PLD MGM cri,cri...crt=(opt,opt...),crt=(opt,opt...)...POO poopt and in the environment DAMAGE, the command PLD DMGM init/dam INIT=ini,DAM=dam,STAGE=stg,PHASE=pha, SIDE=s,CRIT=(cri,cri...),crt=(opt,opt...)...POO poopt produces one or more minimum GM check plots. The quantities are selected by the command PQ MGM and PQ DMGM. The set of available quantities is same as in the criterion check plot. These commands generate same array variables CRPLDSTR and CRPLDVAL as PLD CRC and PLD DCRC. See the previous chapter.
69 (169)
10.3.6 Profile check plot The profile check plot draws the curves forming the lateral profile of the ship and the waterline in the loading or initial condition. In the environment INTACT, the commands PLD PRO POO poo-opt; PLD PRO MOM=name POO poo-opt; PLD PRO CRIT=name POO poo-opt; and in the environment DAMAGE, the commands PLD DPRO init/dam POO poo-opt; PLD DPRO init/dam MOM=name POO poo-opt; PLD DPRO init/dam CRIT=name POO poo-opt; plot the lateral profile and related data. The profile given in the arguments is plotted unless the option MOM=name or CRIT=name is given. If MOM=name or CRIT=name is given, the profile used is that specified in the definition data of the given moment or criterion. The following quantities are available by PQ PRO and PQ DPRO: QUANTITY X Z WLINE ZCG ID DESCRIPTION x-coordinate of the curve z-coordinate of the curve waterline vertical center of area for marking its position marking coordinates for the vertical center of area
Note that the quantities ZCG and ID are available for marking in the drawing the center of area of the part above the waterline and below the waterline (use POO-options MARK, NOCURVE and TAG). The waterline which divides the lateral area into two parts is taken from the loading (initial) condition. In the environment DAMAGE, the cases (initial conditions and damage cases) are fetched from the arguments INIT and DAM unless the optional parameter init/dam is given. The delimiter POO is needed if plot output options follow. The options POO-opt are standard plot output options replacing those given with the command POO.
10.4 Forced calculation

Every listing command generates a result description which contains exactly the same numbers as the corresponding output list. The command CALC generates these result descriptions without producing output. This facility is very useful for macro programmers. Form of the command is CALC sel where sel is same as the parameter list type in the command LIST. The command CALC implies always forced (re)calculation of results.
70 (169)
10.5 Assigning variables

A great number of variables is available from the subsystem for macro programming and checking purposes. Part of the variables are created and updated by dedicated assign commands, some are created and updated when suitable calculation is performed in the mode which makes assignment possible. There is no automatic update for variables; variables once assigned keep their values until the next assignment command or the attached calculation is done again. The variables are not available outside the subsystem. The variables may be divided into three categories: 1. 2. Variables related to output lists. These variables are createdby dedicated ASG-commands and their contents are same as the corresponding lists, assuming all quantities to be selected. Variables related to hydrostatic and stability results of theloading condition. These variables show the GZ curve and hydrostatics of the loading condition or damage case which is last calculated and they are created by dedicated ASG-commands. Variables related to intermediate results. These variables arecreated provided that the assignment mode is on and attached calculation is done. Which ones of the variables are created is fully dependent on what is asked to calculate and what are current arguments.
3.
10.5.1 Variables related to output lists All these variables are one- or two-dimensional arrays. The following notations are used in indexing the array elements in the environment INTACT: icr ncr it nt itr il io no ip np place(i,j) i'th relevant criterion number of relevant criteria i'th draught number of draughts i'th trim i'th loading condition. For local loading conditions il = it+(itr-1)*nt i'th relevant opening number of relevant openings i'th special point number of special points place of the array element ij in the array variable.
In the environment DAMAGE, indexing of arrays follows the contents of the argument arrays (initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases, sides, criteria). > ASG DLIM Variables for limit curves. In the environment INTACT, the arrays are indexed according to draughts (it) if the limit curves are calculated as function of draught and according to trims (itr) if the limit curves are calculated as function of trim. Variable CRLIMT CRLIMTR CRLIMGM CRLIMKG Description Draughts (m) Trims (m) Min. GM's which are in compliance with all criteria (m) Max. KG's which are in compliance with all criteria (m)
71 (169)
CRLIMCRI In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable CRLIMDAM CRLIMGM0 CRLIMKG0 CRLGMRED ASG CRT ASG DCRT
Determining criterion in each interval.
Description Determining damage cases Minimum uncorrected GM's Maximum uncorrected KG's GM reductions due to free liquid surfaces
Variables for criterion table. In the environment INTACT, the arrays (except CRTLOAD, CRTCRI and CRTDES) are indexed so that place(icr,il) = icr+(il-1)*ncr. Variable CRTLOAD CRTCRI CRTDES CRTREQ CRTATTV CRTSTAT CRTUNIT CRTMINGM CRTMAXKG In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable CRTINIT CRTDAM CRTSTAGE CRTPHASE CRTSIDE CRTMGM0 CRTMKG0 ASG LDT ASG DLDT Variables for loading condition table. In the environment INTACT, the variables are indexed according to the loading conditions (il) in the array CRLDCON. Variable CRLDCON CRLDES Description Loading conditions, index il Descriptions of loading conditions Description Initial conditions Damage cases Stages Phases Listing sides PS/SB Minimum uncorrected GM values Maximum uncorrected KG values Description Loading conditions, index il (env. INTAC only) Relevant criteria, index icr Descriptions of criteria, index icr Requirements, unit by corresp. quantity Attained values, unit by corresp. quantity Statuses of criteria Units Min. GM which is in compliance with criterion (m) Max. KG which is in compliance with criterion (m)
72 (169)
CRLDCRI CRLDREQ CRLDATTV CRLDSTAT CRLDUNIT In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable CRLDDAM CRLDSTG CRLDPHA CRLDSIDE ASG MGM ASG DMGM
Determining criteria Requirements of det. criteria, unit by quantity Attained values of det. criteria, unit by quantity Statuses of the loading conditions Units of requirements and attained values
Description Determining damage cases Determining stages Determining phases Determining sides PS/SB
Variables for minimum GM and maximum KG table. In the environment INTACT, the variables are indexed according to the loading conditions (il) in the array CRMLOAD. Variable CRMLOAD CRMT CRMTR CRMINGM CRMAXKG CRDCRI CRMREQ CRMATTV CRMUNIT In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable CRMINI CRMDAM CRMSTAGE CRMPHASE CRMSIDE CRMINGM0 CRMAXKG0 ASG ROP ASG DROP Description Initial conditions Determining damage cases Determining stages Determining phases Determining sides PS/SB Minimum uncorrected GM's (m) Maximum uncorrected KG's (m) Description Loading conditions, index il (env. INTACT only) Draughts of loading conditions (m) Trims of loading conditions (m) Minimum GM's (m) Maximum KG's (m) Determining criteria Requirements of det. criteria, unit by quantity Attained values of det. criteria, unit by quantity Units of requirements and attained values
73 (169)
Variables for relevant openings. In the environment INTACT, the arrays CROIMMA, CROIMMR and CRORED are indexed so that place(io,il) = io+(il-1)*no. Variable CROLCON CRONAME CRODES CROX CROY CROZ CROTYPE CROCONN CROIMMA CROIMMR CRORED In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable CROINI CRODAM CROSTAGE CROPHASE CROSIDE ASG FRB ASG DFRB Variables for freeboard deck edge. In the environment INTACT, the variables are indexed according to the loading conditions (il) in the array CRFLCON. Variable CRFLCON CRFLDES CRFRB CRXFRB CRYFRB CRZFRB CRFIMMA CRFXIMM CRFRED In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable Description Description Loading conditions (env. INTACT only) Descriptions of loading conditions (env. INTACT only) Minimum freeboard (m) x-coordinate where min. freeboard occurs (m) y-coordinate where min. freeboard occurs (m) z-coordinate where min. freeboard occurs (m) Immersion angle of freeboard deck edge (rad) x where freeboard deck edge first immerses (m) Reduction per one degree of heeling (m) Description Initial conditions Damage cases Stages Phases Sides PS/SB Description Loading conditions, index il (env. INTACT only) Names of openings, index io Descriptions of openings, index io x-coordinates of openings (m), index io y-coordinates of openings (m), index io z-coordinates of openings (m), index io Types of openings, index io Compartments connected by openings, index io Immersion angles of openings (rad) Reserves to immersion (m) Reductions per one degree of heeling (m)
74 (169)
CRFINI CRFDAM CRFSTAGE CRFPHASE CRFSIDE ASG MRG ASG DMRG
Initial conditions Damage cases Stages Phases Sides PS/SB
Variables for margin line. In the environment INTACT, the variables are indexed according to the loading conditions (il) in the array CRMLCON. Variable CRMLCON CRMLDES CRIMMR CRXMRG CRYMRG CRZMRG CRMIMMA CRMXIMM In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable CRMINI CRMDAM CRMSTAGE CRMPHASE CRMSIDE ASG POI ASG DPOI Variables for relevant special points. In the environment INTACT, the arrays CRPIMMA, CRPIMMR and CRPRED are indexed so that place(ip,il) = ip+(il-1)*np. Variable CRPLCON CRPNAME CRPDES CRPX CRPY CRPZ CRPIMMA CRPIMMR Description Loading conditions, index il (env. INTACT only) Names of openings, index ip (env. INTACT only) Descriptions of openings, index ip x-coordinates of points (m), index ip y-coordinates of points (m), index ip z-coordinates of points (m), index ip Immersion angles of points (rad) Reserves to immersion (m) Description Initial conditions Damage cases Stages Phases Sides PS/SB Description Loading conditions (env. INTACT only) Descriptions of loading conditions (env. INTACT only) Reserve to immersion of margin line (m) x-coordinate where min. reserve occurs (m) y-coordinate where min. reserve occurs (m) z-coordinate where min. reserve occurs (m) Immersion angle of margin line (rad) x where margin line first immerses (m)
75 (169)
CRPRED In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable CRPINI CRPDAM CRPSTAGE CRPPHASE CRPSIDE ASG PRO ASG DPRO
Reductions per one degree of heeling (m)
Description Initial conditions Damage cases Stages Phases Sides PS/SB
Variables for lateral profile. In the environment INTACT, the arrays are indexed according to loading conditions and profile parts. Variable CRPRLCON CRPROF CRPROFC CRPA CRPAA CRPAU CRPAZ CRPAAZ CRPAUZ CRPMCG CRPMTP2 In the environment DAMAGE only: Variable CRPRINI CRPRDAM CRPRSTG CRPRPHA Description Initial conditions Damage cases Stages Phases Description Loading conditions (env. INTACT only) Name of lateral profile curve (part) Weighting coefficient of profile curve (part) Total area of lateral profile Area of lateral profile above wl Area of lateral profile under wl Vertical center of area of total lateral profile Vertical center of area of lateral profile above wl Vertical center of area of lateral profile under wl Moment of area from the center of underwater part Moment of area from the half draught
10.5.2 Variables related to hydrostatics and stability The following variables contain hydrostatic data and stability curve of loading condition or damage case and calculation arguments. The hydrostatic data and stability curve correspond to the loading condition or damage case which is last calculated. The moment curve (if any) corresponds to the last calculated moment, i.e. which is last referred in some relevant criterion. To be sure that the variables contain data for the certain loading condition or damage case and criterion (if moment wanted), select only one loading condition or draught and trim pair and damage case and one criterion and do calculation.
76 (169)
ASG ARG Variables for calculation arguments. Variable CRENV CRRCR CRLOADS CRINITS CRDAM CRHULL CRARGT CRARGTR CRARGGM CRHEEL CRROP CRRPO CRCFRB CRCMARG CRCBILGE CRCMARG CRRHO CRPROF CRPROFC CRVS CRVF CRNPASS CRITOL CRNITER Description Environment Relevant criteria (command RCR) Loading condition from LD (command LOAD) Initial conditions (env. DAMAGE only) Damage cases (env. DAMAGE only) Calculation hull (command HULL) Draughts (command T), m Trims (command TR), rad GM values (command GM), m Calculation heeling angles (command HEEL), rad Relevant openings (command RPO) Relevant special points (command RPO) Current freeboard deck edge (command CFRB) Current margin line (command CMAR) Current bilge line (command CBIL) Current margin line (command CMAR) Seawater density (command RHO), t/m3 Profile curve(s) (command PROF) Coefficients for profile curve parts (command RPO) Service speed (command VS), m/s Full speed (command VF), m/s Number of passengers (command NPASS) Iteration tolerancies (command ITOL) Number iterations (command NITER)
Variables for hydrostatics and stability. CRGZ, CRMOM, CRT and CRTR are functions of heeling angle and they are indexed according to CRANG. Variable CRANG CRGZ CRMOM CRT CRTR CREPHI CRHARG Description Angles of smooth GZ curve (rad) GZ values of smooth GZ curve (m) Moment arm values corresp. to smooth GZ curve (m) Draughts corresp. to smooth GZ curve (m) Trims corresp. to smooth GZ curve (rad) Dyn. stability arms corresp. to smooth GZ curve (mrad) Calculation heeling angles (rad)
77 (169)
CRGZH CRMOMH CRTH CRTRH CREPHIH CRDISP CRLCB CRTCB CRVCB CRLCG CRTCG CRVCG CRTEQ CRTREQ CRAEQ CRKMT CRGM0 CRGMRED
GZ values corresponding to CRHARG (m) Moment arm values corresp. to CRHARG (m) Draughts corresp. to CRHARG (m) Trims corresp. to CRHARG (rad) Dyn. stability arms corresp. to CRHARG (mrad) Displacement (t) Longitudinal center of buoyancy (m) Transversal center of buoyancy (m) Vertical center of buoyancy (m) Longitudinal center of gravity (m) Transversal center of gravity (m) Vertical center of gravity (m) Equilibrium T, moment not taken into account (m) Equilibrium TR, moment not taken into account (rad) Eq. heeling angle, moment not taken into account (rad) KMT (m) Uncorrected GM (m) GM reduction (m)
To assign the variables properly, the options INI=i, DAM=d, STAGE=s, PHASE=p and CRI=c are recommended to specify the source of stability data. The option CRI=c is needed if the moment arm curve is wanted. Variable CRANG CRGZ CRMOM CRT CRTR CREPHI Description Angles of smooth GZ curve (rad) GZ values of smooth GZ curve (m) Moment arm values corresp. to smooth GZ curve (m) Draughts corresp. to smooth GZ curve (m) Trims corresp. to smooth GZ curve (rad) Dyn. stability arms corresp. to smooth GZ curve (mrad)
10.5.3 Variables related to intermediate results The intermediate result variables contain data which is created during calculation and which is not shown otherwise else. These variables are single variables which means that they can contain values only from the last call of the procedure which assigns them. In general, it can be said that variables are created or updated during calculation of the last loading (initial) condition, damage case, stage, phase and criterion. Additionally, if there are not reserved different variables for the case 'GM of the loading condition' and case 'minimum GM', the assigned value corresponds to the minimum GM, if calculation lastly made included quantities 'minimum GM' or 'maximum KG'. The quantities 'minimum GM' and 'maximum KG' are not calculated, if the quantity selection CRT does not contain them and calculation is performed by LIST CRT (DCRT) or CALC CRT (DCRT). To be sure that the values come from the right place, before calculation select only one loading condition, damage case and criterion and select suitable set of quantities by LQ CRT or LQ DCRT and calculate by CALC CRT or CALC DCRT. ASG ON
78 (169)
Set assignment of intermediate variables on. Creation and updating of intermediate variables happens so far as assignment is set off by ASG OFF The following table shows the intermediate variables and connections where they are assigned.
Variable CRLCASE CRCRIT CRFA CRFRBRD CRFRBA CRROLL CRMROLL
Description Last calc. loading condition Last calc. criterion Flooding angle (rad) Freeboard (m) Imm.angle of frb deck edge (rad) Roll angle corresp. to GM of loading condition (rad) Roll angle corresp. to min. GM (rad)
Assigned Every time calc. done Every time calc. done Every time calc. done Every time calc. done Every time calc. done Moments IMOWEATHER and USSRWEATHER Moments IMOWEATHER and USSRWEATHER Every time calc. done
CRLIM1
CRLIM2
CRMLIM1 CRMLIM2 CREQA CRRNGL1 CRRNGL2 CREQAMOM
CRMAXA CRMNAME CRMTYPE CRMOM0 CRMPROF CRLPAU CRLPAA CRZLPAU CRZLPAA CRTP2 CRC CRP
Lower limit of range of crit. corresponding to GM of loading condition (rad) Upper limit of range of crit. Every time calc. done corresponding to GM of loading condition (rad) Lower limit of range of crit. Every time calc. done corresponding to minimum GM (rad) Upper limit of range of crit. Every time calc. done corresponding to minimum GM (rad) Steady eq. heeling angle without Every time calc. done moment (rad) Lower limit or range Criterion RANGE Upper limit or range Criterion RANGE Steady eq. heeling angle with Criteria MAXGZ,MAXHEEL, moment (rad) MINGM,RESFLD,RESFRB, ARATIO1,ARATIO2,RESDYN, Position of max. GZ (rad) Range def. MAX; crit. Name of moment Every time mom. calc. Type of moment Every time mom. calc. Moment at zero heeling (tm) Every time mom. calc. Profile curve components (array) Any wind moment Lateral profile area under Any wind moment; crit. waterline (m2) MINGM (REQ BY PROF) Lateral profile area above Any wind moment; crit. waterline (m2) MINGM (REQ BY PROF) Height of center of lateral Any wind moment; crit. profile area under wl (m) MINGM (REQ BY PROF) Height of center of lateral Any wind moment; crit. profile area above wl (m) MINGM (REQ BY PROF) Half draught T/2 (m) Any wind moment C-coefficient (t/m2 WIND, Moments WIND,WINDMODU, WINDMODU; dim.less TURN) TURN Wind pressure (t/m2 IMOWEATHER, Moments IMOWEATHER, MINGM; Pa USSRWEATHER) USSRWEATHER; crit.
79 (169)
CRAK CRNAV CRSPEED CRLEN CRMNPAS CRPASSW CRPSHIFT CRCARGO CRCMASS CRCSHIFT CRGZE CRAMAXGZ CRDFRES CRADFRES CRDFOPE CRFIMRES CRXFIMR CRAFRES CRABIL CRXBIL CRAPOI CRIMP CRCPROF CRAFRES2 CRAVS CRAREAA CRAREAB CRAREAAB CRAREABC CRDYNSTA CRREQ
CRATTV
CRREQM CRDYNSTA CRREQ
CRATTV
CRREQM
Area of bilge keels and bar keel (m2) Navigation area Speed (m/s) Length of waterline (m) Number of passengers Weight of one passenger (t) Transv. shift of pass. (m) Cargoes shifted (name array) Masses of cargoes (t, array) Transv. shifts of cargoes (m, array) Height of GZ at first intercept (m) Angle where max. GZ attained within range (rad) Reserve to downflooding (m) Angle where downflooding reserve attained (rad) Opening causing min. reserve Reserve to imm. of freebrd (m) x of min. reserve (m) Angle where min. reserve (rad) Angle where bilge comes out of water (rad) x where bilge comes out of water (m) Angle where first spec. point immerses (rad) Point which first immerses Profile curve components (name array) Angle where half of freeboard immersed (rad) Angle of vanishing stab. (rad) Area a (mrad) Area b (mrad) Area ab (mrad) Area bc (mrad) Dyn. stability arm (mrad) Requirement of crit. corresp. to GM of loading condition (Dimension acc. to quantity) Attained value corresp. to GM of loading condition (Dimension acc. to quantity) Requirement of crit. corresp. Dyn. stability arm (mrad) Requirement of crit. corresp. to GM of loading condition (Dimension acc. to quantity) Attained value corresp. to GM of loading condition (Dimension acc. to quantity) Requirement of crit. corresp.
Moments IMOWEATHER, USSRWEATHER Moment USSRWEATHER Moment IMOTURN,USSRTURN Moment IMOTURN,USSRTURN Moment PASSENGER Moment PASSENGER Moment PASSENGER Moment LOADSHIFT Moment LOADSHIFT Moment LOADSHIFT Criterion MAXGZ (REQ BY GZE) Crit. MAXGZ Crit. MAXHEEL, RESFLD Crit. MAXHEEL Crit. Crit. Crit. Crit. Crit. MAXHEEL, RESFLD MAXHEEL, RESFRB MAXHEEL MAXHEEL MAXHEEL
Crit. MAXHEEL Crit. MAXHEEL Crit. MAXHEEL Criterion MINGM (REQ BY PROF) Criterion MINGM (REQ BY PROF) Crit. VSTAB Crit. ARATIO1,RESDYN Crit. ARATIO1 Crit. ARATIO2,RESDYN Crit. ARATIO2 Crit. DYNARM All criteria
All criteria
All criteria Crit. DYNARM All criteria
All criteria
All criteria
80 (169)
CRATTVM CRMGM
to min. GM (Dimension acc. to quantity) Attained value corresp. to min. GM (Dimension acc. to quantity) Minimum GM (m)
All criteria All criteria
The command alternative ASG DEL deletes all CR-variables created so far. The variables are also deleted at exit from the task. Variables for hydrostatics and stability. The array variables
11 Administrative functions
The administrative commands handle data which are permanently stored in the data base. These data are criteria, criterion groups, moments, openings, freeboard deck edges, bilge lines, special points and margin lines. The administrative commands are:
s s s
list catalog of stored data (CAT) list and edit stored data in the input format (DES, EDI) delete stored data (DEL).
The commands need to know what kind of data they are dealing with. This is given by the parameter 'type'. The parameter has nine alternatives: CRIT, CGROUP, MOM, OPE, FRB, BILGE, POINT, MARG and LOAD. The command CAT type prints list of items stored in the project data base. The command alternatives CAT CRI SYSDB, CAT CGR SYSDB and CAT MOM SYSDB make the search in the system data base and list the names of items stored in it. In the environment DAMAGE, the following additional alternatives are available: CAT INIT, CAT DAM, CAT IGR and CAT DGR. The command DES type name, name, ...; or DES type ALL; prints stored data in the input format. The first alternative prints only the given items, the second one prints them all. If the type is CRIT and 'name' is name of a criterion group, all the criteria belonging to the group are printed. The command EDIT edits the stored data in the input format. The command is similar to DES. The easiest way to change data is to call EDI type name; ... edit the definition ... ADD; Data are removed from the data base by the command UNS type name, name, ...;
81 (169)
12 Examples
This chapter contains examples of definition data of various criteria.
12.1 IMO Resolution A.749(ES.IV)

12.1.1 5.1. (a) Area under the GZ curve CRIT AREA30 'Area from 0 to 30 deg.'; TYPE MINAREA; REQ 0.055; RANGE 0,30; OK; CRIT AREA40 'Area from 0 to 40 deg.'; TYPE MINAREA; REQ 0.09; RANGE 0,MIN(40,FA); OK; CRIT AREA3040 'Area from 30 to 40 deg.'; TYPE MINAREA; REQ 0.03; RANGE 30,MIN(40,FA); OK; 12.1.2 5.1 (b) Righting lever GZ CRIT LEVER 'Righting lever at least 0.2 m'; TYPE MAXGZ; REQ 0.2; RANGE 30,-; OK; 12.1.3 5.1 (c) Position of the maximum righting arm CRIT POSMAX 'Position of the max. arm'; TYPE POSMAX; REQ 25; OK; 12.1.4 5.1 (d) Metacentric height CRIT MINGM 'Minimum GM at least 0.15 m'; TYPE MINGM; REQ 0.15; OK; 12.1.5 5.2 (a) Crowding of passengers MOM PASS 'Mom. due to crowding of passengers'; TYPE PASSENGER; OK; CRIT PASS 'Max. heeling due to crowding of passengers';
82 (169)
TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ 10; MOM PASS; OK; 12.1.6 5.2 (b) Turning MOM TURN 'Turning, speed 8 m/s'; TYPE IMOTURN; OK; CRIT TURN 'Max. heel due to turning'; TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ 10; MOM TURN; OK;
12.2 IMO Resolution A.562(14) (weather criterion)

MOM IMOWIND 'Wind moment'; TYPE IMOWEATHER; OK; CRIT IMOW 'IMO weather criterion'; TYPE ARATIO1; REQ 1.0; RANGE EQ-ROLL,MIN(50,FA) MOM IMOWIND; OK;
12.3 IMO Resolution A.649(16) (1989 MODU CODE)

MOM WIND 'Wind moment acc. to wind tunnel test'; CURVE POLYGON; MOM (0,1050) (20,1150) (30,1210) (40,1290) (50,1400); OK; CRIT MODU 'MODU CODE'; TYPE ARATIO2; REQ 1.4; RANGE 0,FA; MOM WIND; OK; CRIT POSGZ 'GZ>0 over entire range from 0 to the 2nd intercept'; TYPE MINGZ; REQ 0 0; RANGE 0 OK;
12.4 USSR Register of Shipping

12.4.1 2.1 Weather criterion MOM USSRWIND 'Wind moment acc. to USSR rules';
83 (169)
TYPE USSRWEATHER; OK; CRIT USSRW 'Weather criterion by USSR rules'; TYPE ARATIO1; REQ 1.0; RANGE -ROLL,FA; MOM USSRWIND; OK; 12.4.2 2.2 Curve of statical stability CRIT MAXARM 'Maximum arm of statical stability'; TYPE MAXGZ; REQ 0.2; RANGE 30,-; OK; CRIT VSTAB 'Angle of vanishing stability'; TYPE VSTAB; REQ 60; OK; CRIT MINGM 'GM positive'; TYPE MINGM; REQ 0; OK; 12.4.3 3.1 Passenger ships MOM PASS 'Crowding of passengers'; TYPE PASSENGER; OK; MOM TURN 'Heeling moment due to turning'; TYPE USSRTURN; OK; MOM PASS+TURN 'Combined moment passengers + turning'; SUM PASS,TURN; OK; CRIT MAXHEELPASS 'Max. heeling due to crowding of passengers'; TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ MIN(10,FRB,BILGE,FA=<0.5); MOM PASS; OK; CRIT MAXHEELCOMB 'Max. heeling due to passengers and turning'; TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ MIN(12,FRB,BILGE,FA=<0.75); MOM PASS+TURN; OK;
84 (169)
12.5 US Coast Guard

12.5.1 Weather criterion CRIT USCGW 'Weather criterion by USCG'; TYPE MINGM REQ BY PROF P=0.0608; OK;
12.6 Norwegian Maritime Directorate

12.6.1 Mobile offshore units MOM TEST 'Wind moment by wind tunnel tests'; CURVE POLYGON; MOM (0,1230) (10,1280) (20,1340) (30,1410) (40,1440) (50,1400); OK; CRIT HEELING 'Max. heeling 15 deg.'; TYPE MAXHEEL; REQ 15; MOM TEST; OK; CRIT VSTAB 'Second intercept at an angle >30'; TYPE VSTAB; REQ 30; MOM TEST; OK; CRIT GM 'GM at least 0.5 m'; TYPE MINGM; REQ 0.5; OK; CRIT AREARATIO '(A+B) > 1.4*(B+C)'; TYPE ARATIO2; REQ 1.4; MOM TEST; OK;
12.7 See-Berufsgenossenschaft (SBG)

CRIT ARM 'Righting arm at 30 deg.'; TYPE MAXGZ; REQ BY RANGE 0.02,0.01,60; AT 30; OK; CRIT GM 'GM > 0.15 m'; TYPE MINGM; REQ 0.15; OK; CRIT AREA30 'Area from 0 to 30 deg.';
85 (169)
TYPE MINAREA; REQ 0.055; RANGE 0,30; OK; CRIT AREA40 'Area from 0 to 40 deg.'; TYPE MINAREA; REQ 0.090; RANGE 0,40; OK; CRIT AREA3040 'Area from 30 to 40 deg.'; TYPE MINAREA; REQ 0.030; RANGE 30,40; OK; CRIT RANGE 'Range of stability 50 deg.'; TYPE RANGE; REQ 50; OK;
12.8 US Navy
MOM WIND 'Wind moment'; CURVE COS2; MOM 1220; OK; CRIT USGZ 'GZ at eq. 0.6*maximum'; TYPE MAXGZ; REQ BY GZE 1.67; MOM WIND; OK; CRIT AREA 'A1 > 1.4*A2'; TYPE ARATIO1; REQ 1.4; RANGE EQ-25,-; MOM WIND; OK;
13 CR Commands
13.1 Commands for definitions
BILGE -> Define bilge curve The command enters in a subtask which defines a bilge curve. See also command CBIL for selecting the current bilge curve and using a tangent or point approximation instead of curve. BILGE name text name: name of bilge curve
86 (169)
text: CGROUP
descriptive text (optional). -> Define criterion group The command enters in a subtask which defines a criterion group.
CGROUP name text name: text: CRITERION name of group. Must not be name of any criterion. descriptive text (optional). -> Define stability criterion The command enters in a subtask which defines a stability criterion. For relevant criteria, see commands RCR and ICR. CRIT name text name: text: FRB name of criterion. Must not be ALL or name of any criterion group. descriptive text (optional). -> Define freeboard deck edge The command enters in a subtask which defines a freeboard deck edge. See also command CFRB for selecting the current freeboard deck edge and using a height approximation instead of curve in freeboard calculation. Note that the program assumes the freeboard deck edge symmetric with respect to y=0, if the curve is open, i.e. the first and last points coindice. If the curve is closed, no symmetry is assumed. FRB name text name: text: MARGIN name of freeboard deck edge. descriptive text (optional). -> Define margin line The command enters in a subtask which defines a margin line. Note that the program assumes the margin line symmetric with respect to y=0, if the curve is open, i.e. the first and last points coindice. If the curve is closed, no symmetry is assumed. MARG name text name: text: MOMENT name of margin line descriptive text (optional). -> Define heeling moment curve The command enters in a subtask which defines a heeling moment curve. The heeling moment curves are referred in definition of stability criteria. MOMENT name text
87 (169)
name: text: OGROUP
name of heeling moment curve. descriptive text (optional). -> Define opening group Define a named group of openings. This definition allows referencing to the group of openings instead of single ones.
OGROUP name text name: text: OPENING name of group descriptive text (optional). -> Define opening The command enters in a subtask which defines an opening. Openings are used in calculation of downflooding angle and reserve to downflooding. For relevant openings, see commands ROP and IRO. OPENING name text name: text: POINT name of opening. Must not be ALL. descriptive text (optional). -> Define special point The command enters in a subtask which defines a point. Points are used for checking how some special points are situated relative to the external waterline. For relevant points, see commands RPO and IPO. name: text: name of point. Must not be ALL. descriptive text (optional).
13.2 Arguments - intact criteria

ARG Argument handling The command lists, stores and restores arguments. ARG List current arguments. ARG SAVE name text Save the current arguments in the project data base as named set. name: text: ARG GET name Assign arguments from the stored set. name: name of the set. name of the set. (optional) descriptive text. This text will be shown by CAT ARG.
88 (169)
ARG CAT List catalog of stored argument sets. ARG UNS name Unsave argument set. name: AZI name of the set. Azimuth angle The command defines the stability axis other than the x-axis that will be used in all calculations. All stability quantities are calculated in the plane perpendicular to the stability axis. The input and output heeling angles are interpreted as angles around the stability axis and input and output trims are trims along the stability axis if not otherwise stated. AZI a a: azimuth angle (deg). The stability axis makes an angle 'a' with the x-axis on the xy-plane. 'a' is positive towards the +y-axis and negative towards the -y-axis. Current bilge curve Select the current bilge curve. Bilge curve is used for calculation of heeling angle at which the bilge comes out of water (criterion MAXHEEL, alternative BILGE). CBIL name Use the bilge curve defined by BILGE. CBIL TG=tg Instead of a bilge curve, approximate the bilge by a point where the tangent of the mid frame makes an angle of tg degrees with the y-axis. TG=tg: inclination of tangent (degrees).
CBILGE
CBIL POI=(x,y,z) Instead of a bilge curve, approximate the bilge by the given point. POI=(x,y,z): CBIL OFF No current bilge curve. CBIL The command without parameters returns the current bilge curve or approximation. CFRB Current freeboard deck edge Select the current freeboard deck edge. The freeboard deck edge is used for calculation of quantities related to the freeboard. CFRB name Use the freeboard deck edge defined by FRB. name: name of freeboard deck edge. coordinates of the point.
89 (169)
CFRB H=h Use a height approximation instead of the freeboard deck edge curve. The height approximation equals to the point in the mid frame at height h. H=h: CFRB OFF No current freeboard deck edge. CFRB The command without parameters returns the current freeboard deck edge. CMAR Current margin line Select the current margin line. The margin line is not used in calculations, only its position relative to the waterline is possible to list. CMAR name Use the named line in output. The margin line must be defined by the command 'MARG name'. CMAR OFF No current margin line. DISP Displacement alternative way to define the floating position. Will reset T (draught). DISP d,d,... d: GM displacement(tons), single value or series syntax. GM for local loading conditions GM value(s) for the loading condition(s) defined locally (loading defined by draught, trim and GM or KG). GM gm gm: GM (m), same value for all local loading conditions. Default value 0.15 m. height (m).
GM t,gm t,gm ... GM as a function of draught. For every local loading condition, GM is calculated from the curve by linear interpolation. If draught of the local loading condition is outside the curve, GM of the first or last point is used. t,gm: GZCUR draught and corresponding GM. Draughts must be in ascending order. get GZ curve from outer source The calculated GZ curve may be replaced by some other curve defined in the given table. GZCUR table table: name of table without prefix TAB*. The table should have the columns HEEL, GZ, T and TR. The two last columns are for calculation of openings.
90 (169)
HEEL
Heeling angles for local loading condition Calculation heeling angles for loading conditions to be calculated locally (loading conditions defined by draught, trim and GM).
HEEL a,a,... a: HULL heeling angle (deg), single value or series (NAPA standard format). Calculation hull Calculation hull for loading conditions to be calculated locally (loading conditions defined by draught, trim and GM). HULL name name: ICR name of hull, default = stability hull from the reference system. Irrelevant criteria Remove the given criteria from the set of relevant criteria. ICR crit,crit,... crit: ICR ALL All criteria are irrelevant, i.e. the set of relevant criteria is empty. IPO Irrelevant points Remove the given points from the set of relevant special points. IPO name,name,... name: IPO ALL All points are irrelevant, i.e. the set of relevant points is empty. IRO Irrelevant openings Remove the given openings from the set of relevant openings. IRO name,name,... name: IRO ALL All openings are irrelevant, i.e. the set of relevant openings is empty. IRO EXTERNAL All relevant openings connecting the sea to a compartment. IRO INTERNAL All relevant openings connecting two compartments. IRO PIPE name of opening or opening group. name of opening. name of criterion or name of criterion group.
91 (169)
All relevant openings of type pipe (OTYPE PIPE). ITOL Change iteration tolerance The minimum GM (max. KG) which is in compliance with the criterion is calculated by an iterative method. Iteration is terminated if the iteration step of GM is less than tolerance (default 5 mm) or the difference between the required and attained value is less than tolerance which depends on quantity (default for metric quantities 1 mm, for angle quantities 0.1 deg, for area quantities 0.0001 mrad and for area ratio quantities 0.01 = 1 %). ITOL alt=tol,alt=tol,... alt=tol: any of the following five alternatives (tol > 0): GM=tol: M=tol: DEG=tol: MRAD=tol: RATIO=tol: tolerance for iteration step of GM (m) tolerance for metric quantities (m) tolerance for angle quantities (deg) tolerance for area quantities (mrad) tolerance for area ratio quantities (ratio, dimensionless).
If one changes the tolerance of the iteration step of GM, but does not change some quantity tolerance which has not been changed never before, the quantity tolerance follows the GMtolerance in the following way: tol = gmtol/5 for metric quantities, tol = 20*gmtol for angle quantities, tol = gmtol/50 for area quantities and tol = 2*gmtol for area ratio quantities. KG KG for local loading conditions KG value(s) for the loading condition(s) defined locally (loading defined by draught, trim and GM or KG). KG kg kg: KG (m), same value for all local loading conditions.
KG t,kg t,kg ... KG as a function of draught. For every local loading condition, KG is calculated from the curve by linear interpolation. If draught of the local loading condition is outside the curve, KG of the first or last point is used. t,kg: LOA draught and corresponding KG. Draughts must be in ascending order. Select loading conditions The command selects the loading conditions to be treated in this run. The loading conditions must be defined and stability calculated in the loading conditions subsystem. Note! If one wants to treat loading conditions defined by draught, trim and GM (e.g. for limit curve calculation), there must be no selected loading condition (if necessary call LOA NONE). LOA name,name,... name: LOA NONE LOA name of loading condition or loading condition group.
92 (169)
Make the set empty. The set must be empty for making it possible to treat the loading conditions defined by draught, trim and GM. LOA The command without parameters lists the current selection. MODE Calculation mode for (local) loading conditions Calculation mode for loading conditions to be calculated locally (loading conditions defined by draught, trim and GM). This command has no effect on the loading conditions fetched from LD (except MODE STEP which recalculates also LD-conditions). MODE alt,... alt: mode alternative. There are 11 possible modes: FREE: FIX: STEP: NOSTEP: TCG0: TCGB: SB: PS: AUTO: the ship is let trim freely (default) the ship in kept in even keel steps occur at angles of downflooding (Note! this mode implies free trim) there are no steps due to downflooding (default) transverse center of gravity at 0.0, i.e. asymmetric hull can be seen in GZ curves (default) transverse center of gravity at TCB, i.e. there is no steady heeling due to asymmetric hull the ship is forced to list to the starboard side the ship is forced to list to the port side the program selects the listing side automaticly depending on the relative position of the center of gravity and center of buoyancy in the upright (default). treat GZ-curves by the constant displacement method. The constant displacement method differs from the variable displacement method only if the STEP mode is on and downflooding takes place to a room having liquid load (see the documents of damage stability). treat GZ-curves by the variable displacement method (see CDISP). Keep results in the data base removing them from the memory immediately after use. This option ensures large runs also in small computers (default). Keep results in the memory during whole run without removing them after use. This option may be used if connection to the data base is slow and there is enough memory space in the computer to keep all results in the memory at the same time.
CDISP:
VDISP: DB:
MEM:
NITER
Maximum number of iterations The minimum GM (max. KG) which is in compliance with the criterion is calculated by an iterative method. To prevent endless loops, there is maximum number of iterations. By this command the maximum number may be changed.
93 (169)
NITER n n: NPASS number of iterations, default 100. Number of passengers Number of passengers is used in calculation of moment caused by crowding of passengers. The number given explicitly in the moment definition overrules this data. NPASS n n: OPARR number of passengers. Opening arrangement A table based way to define all openings available in the task. The opening arrangement is a table with prefix OPE*, each row defining an opening. If an opening arrangement is active, all separately defined openings are ignored as well as the commands OPENING, EDI OPE, DEL OPE and COPY OPE. The commands CAT OPE, DES OPE, ROP, IRO and OGROUP work normally. OPARR name Activate the table OPE*name as an opening arrangement. name: OPARR OFF Deactivate the opening arrangement (the openings defined by the task OPEN become available). Columns of the arrangement: ID: DES: WT: identification of the opening description of the opening watertightness of opening. Type of opening regarding its severity in progressive flooding. The alternatives: UNPROTECTED WEATHERTIGHT WATERTIGHT must not submerged partly watertight totally watertight name of table without prefix OPE*.
UNNOPROGRESSIVE (in DA only) unprotected but in the stage PROGRESSIVE no new compartment is flooded through it. WEPROGRESSIVE (in DA only) weathertight but in the stage PROGRESSIVE new compartment may be flooded through it.
x-, y- and z-coordinate of the opening (check point of immersion). REFX,REFY,REFZ: FR: OTYPE: CONN: x-coordinate of opening as frame number type of opening as construction, like door, escape, pipe etc. Pair of compartments connected by the opening. The syntax comp1,comp2 defines the connection in both directions, the syntax comp1 -> comp2 defines one-directional connection from comp1 to comp2. Either of the names may be SEA. In DA, the current relevancy of the opening is checked by the following logic: The opening is relevant if (provided it is not watertight)
94 (169)
it leads from the sea to an intact compartment it leads from a damaged compartment to an intact compartment connection information is missing The opening is irrelevant if
it leads to a damaged compartment it connects two intact compartments it leads to the sea and the connection is one-directional it leads from an intact compartment and the connection is one-directional
STAGE:
flooding stage where the opening is taken into account. The column defines the stage(s) where the opening is taken into account in calculation of probabilistic damage stability for SOLAS II-1. The factor s will be zero if the opening is immersed in the specified stage (default: the final stage). Alternatives: 'name of stage', ALL (all stages) or FINAL (the last stage). Fillig colour(s) of opening in plotting tasks DRW FLO and DRW OPEN of DA. Up to four logical fill codes col1 col2 col3 col4 may be given : col1 = opening has become irrelevant and above the water line, default GREEN; col2 = opening is relevant and above the water line, default GREEN; col3 = opening has become irrelevant and is under the water line, default RED; opening is relevant and under the water line, default RED. size of the square marker in plotting tasks DRW FLO and DRW OPEN of DA. A preceding asterisk defines the size directly in the dimensions of the drawing otherwise it is in the ship scale. Text position in x-, y- and z-sections relative to the center of the marker representing the opening. The text position is defined by direction (one of the alternatives below) and optional distance. The distance is in the ship scale or directly in the dimensions of the drawing if the distance begins with an asterisk. The following alternatives are available: AC AR L UR UC UL R AL O: dis: above, centered, synonym N dis dis: above, to the right, synonym NE dis dis: to the left, synonym E dis dis: under, to the right, synonym SE dis dis: under, centered, synonym S dis dis: under, to the left, synonym SW dis dis: to the right, synonym W dis dis: above, to the left, synonym NW dis over
COL:
SIZE: TPX,TPY,TPZ:
PBAL
Add permanent ballast The command adds permanent ballast to a set of tanks. The permanent ballast will be used in all calculations and it behaves like normal load.
PBAL baltab Add permanent ballast to the tanks as defined in the table 'baltab'.
95 (169)
baltab:
name of a table containing the column TANK for name of tank, column VOL and/or FILL for volume (m3) or filling (%) of contents and column DENS for density (t/m3) of ballast. Example: Definition of table NEW TAB*PERBAL COL, TANK COL, VOL COL, FILL COL, DENS Contents of table TANK VOL FILL DENS NM
---------------------------R10 R11 R401 PBAL OFF Remove permanent ballast. PROF Profile Name of the default profile curve used in wind moment calculations and in criterion MINGM, REQ BY PROF. The profile given explicitly in definition of the moment or criterion, overrules this data. PROF name NOCL Profile consists of one curve. name: NOCL: name of the curve representing the whole profile (option) do not add containers to the lateral profile. 100.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.025 50.0 1.025 50.0 1.025
PROF (name,name,...) NOCL Profile consists of many different curves. name: NOCL: name of curve representing one part of the profile (option) do not add containers to the lateral profile.
PROF (name,c,name,c,...) NOCL Profile consists of many different parts, each part weighted by the related coefficient. name: name of curve representing one part of the profile
96 (169)
c:
for wind heeling moment calculation, the portion of lateral area that is above the waterline is multiplied by the dimensionless coefficient c. These coefficients are used, for instance, if there are different wind forces at different heights or different profile parts need different shape coefficients. (option) do not add containers to the lateral profile.
NOCL: PROF OFF
No current profile curve. RCR Relevant criteria Define the set of relevant criteria. The command replaces the current set by the given set of criteria. RCR crit,crit,... crit: RCR ALL All criteria stored in the data base are relevant. RCR The command without parameters lists the set of relevant criteria. RHO RHO r r: ROP density (t/m3), default from the reference system. Relevant openings Define the set of relevant openings. The command replaces the current set by the given set of openings. Only the relevant openings contribute to calculation of downflooding angle and reserve to downflooding. ROP name,name,... name: ROP ALL All openings stored in the data base are relevant. ROP EXTERNAL All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement' connecting the sea to a compartment. ROP INTERNAL All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement connecting two compartments. ROP PIPE All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement of type pipe (OTYPE PIPE). ROP name of opening or opening group. Seawater density name of criterion or name of criterion group. If the criterion or group cannot be found in the project data base, it is tried to find in the system data base.
97 (169)
The command without parameters lists the set of relevant openings. RPO Relevant points Define the set of relevant special points. The command replaces the current set by the given set of points. The relevant special points are used for calculation of one alternative of criterion MAXHEEL (req. POINT) and their positions relative to the waterline may be checked. RPO name,name,... name: RPO ALL All points stored in the data base are relevant. RPO The command without parameters lists the set of relevant points. T Draught for local loading condition Draught(s) for the loading condition(s) defined locally (loading condition(s) defined by draught, trim and GM). T t,t... t: draught (m), single value or series (NAPA standard format). Default set (0.6*tdwl,1.1*tdwl,0.1*tdwl), tdwl = design waterline from the reference system. Trims for local loading conditions Trims for the loading conditions defined locally (loading conditions defined by draught, trim and GM or KG). An alternative way to give trims is the command TRA. TR tr,tr... tr: TRA trim (m), single value or series (NAPA standard format). Default 0. Trim angles for local loading conditions Trim angles for the loading conditions defined locally (loading conditions defined by draught, trim and GM or KG). An alternative way to give trims is the command TR. TRA tr,tr... tr: VF trim angle (deg), single value or series (NAPA standard format). Default 0. Full speed Default full speed to be used in turning moment calculation by USSR rules. The speed given explicitly in the moment definition overrules this data. VF v v: VS full speed (m/s). Service speed name of point.
TR
98 (169)
Default service speed to be used in turning moment calculation by IMO. The speed given explicitly in the moment definition overrules this data. VS v v: WMOD service speed (m/s). Wind model Name of table defining 3-dimensional wind model used in wind moment calculations and in criterion MINGM, REQ BY PROF. The wind model is used instead of the profile wherever the program refers to the area exposed to the wind and it overrules the argument PROF. The projected area exposed to the wind and the lateral area of the water resistance changes according to trim, heel and wind direction relative to the floating structure. WMOD name dir name: name of table defining the wind model. The table should have the columns NAME, COEF, WRCOEF and SIDE. The column NAME contains the names of surfaces of the model and the columns COEF and WRCOEF contain corresponding shape and water resistance coefficients. If the column WRCOEF is missing, water resistance coefficient 1.0 is assumed. The column SIDE tells which one side of the surface is exposed to the wind. The alternatives are O = outside, I = inside and B = both sides. B should be used for surfaces having no volume and which are exposed to the wind on both sides. The default side may be given by quantity SIDE: QNT SIDE s. If this is missing, the program default is O. (option) wind direction relative to the structure (deg). The default direction is perpendicular to the stability axis. The wind direction makes an angle 'dir' with the y-axis so that if dir=0, wind blows from the -y-axis and 'dir' grows towards the +x-axis. vertical center of gravity for permissible moment lists This argument is used to control lists where there are multiple different center of gravities in the same listing, e.g. LIST AHM or PHM. ZCG values values: the center of gravities in NAPA series syntax, or OFF to set it to not given.
dir:
ZCG
13.3 List output - intact criteria

ASG Assign variables The command assigns sets of variables related to different environments and connections. Note that the variables keep their values until the next assignment command despite changes in arguments has been done, there is no automatic update of variables. For the names, description and indexing of variables, see the manual CR.2, chapter 3.5. ASG env opt Assign variables related to the given environment. If the environment contains variables needing calculated results, missing data is automaticly generated and out-of-date data is automaticly updated. env: environment defining the set of variables to be created. ARG: variables related to calculation arguments
99 (169)
CALC: GZC: LIM: CRT: LDT: MGM: ROP: FRB: MRG: POI: PRO:
variables related to hydrostatics and stability of loading conditions variables related to the GZ-curves (same contents as in LIST GZC) variables related to the GM- and KG-limit curves (same contents as in LIST LIMCURVE) variables related to the criterion table (same contents as in LIST CRTAB) variables related to the loading condition table (same contents as in LIST LDTAB) variables related to the minimum GM and maximum KG table (same contents as in LIST MGMTAB) variables related to the relevant openings (same contents as in LIST ROP) variables related to the freeboard (same contents as in LIST FRB) variables related to the margin line (same contents as in LIST MRG) variables related to the special points (same contents as in LIST POINTS) variables related to the area exposed to the wind (same contents as in LIST PROF). The model data (profile or wind model) is taken from the arguments unless the option MOM=name or CRIT=name is given in which case data is taken from the given moment or criterion. set ON mode in which intermediate calculation results (e.g. lateral area above wl) are stored in variables. The set of variables and their contents depend on the path along which calculation proceeds, i.e. what is asked to calculate and in which order (see the manual!). assignment of intermediate result variables is set OFF.
ON:
OFF: opt:
CURVE=name(x-coord) (special option for ASG POI) intersect curve at given x-coordinates, generate special points at the intersection points and add them the set of relevant points. 'name' is name of a geometric curve or freeboard deck edge and 'x-coord' is set of x-coordinates where to intersect the curve. There are three ways to give coordinates: x1, x2, x3..., explicit set; D=step, equally spaced values over the x-range of the curve; xarr, values provided by a calculator array.
ASG DEL Delete all CR-variables. CALC Generate result description for specified list The command generates the result description of the specified list type, i.e. the description which contains all the quantities which are available in connection with listing. Also the command LIST generates the same description. CALC implies forced recalculation of results. CALC ltype ltype: type of list (same as in the command list): LIMCURVE: CRTAB: LDTAB: MGMTAB: GM and KG limit curves, description RES*LIMTABLE criterion table, description RES*CRTABLE loading condition table, description RES*LDTABLE minimum GM and maximum KG table, description RES*MGMTABLE
100 (169)
ROP: POINTS: FRB: MRG: PROF:
relevant openings, description RES*OPENINGS special points, description RES*POINTS freeboard, description RES*FRB margin line, description RES*MARGIN lateral profile, description RES*PROFILE. The profile data is taken from the arguments unless the option MOM=name or CRIT=name is given in which case data is taken from the given moment or criterion.
CALC SUMM arg1,arg2 Generate result description for summary tables, name of description RES*SUMTABLE. arg1,arg2: FIGURE (optional) argument selection, see explanations for LIST. Insert figure into the result list The command allows a stored drawing or currently made graphic output to be added to the output list. FIG * SIZE du dv, pos This form inserts the last graphic component made in CR. In order to make this possible, graphic output must be directed to the intermediate file (!GR F or !GR +F), and the drawing concerned must be either currently open, or closed but without a new being opened. The result from the PLOT command is always closed, while the command EDR is needed for plots made by DRW and SETUP. FIG name ... This form inserts a drawing stored in the data base. For more detailed information about this form, see !EXPL FIG/GEN. LF Empty line(s) The commands adds empty lines to the result list, either a specified number or to a given position. LF Add one empty line. LF n Add n empty lines. LF TO n ! Add lines to reach specified position on page. See !EXPL LF/GEN. LIST Start listing The command starts listings of various kinds. Calculation of missing data is carried out automatically; there is no need for separate calculation commands. The scope of listing is controlled by the argument commands, contents of listing is controlled by the quantity selection command LQ and layout is controlled by the table output options and format control command ! FOR. LIST .id
101 (169)
List according to standard macro. For alternatives, use LIST .CAT. For explanations of a given macro, use LIST .id ?. LIST ltype NOHEADER opt tab-opt ltype: type of list, one of the following alternatives: LIMCURVE: GM and KG limit curves. For each argument trim, there is one curve as function of draught (option TFUN, default) or for each argument draught, there is one curve as function of trim (option TRFUN). Quantity selection by LQ LIM. criterion table. Quantity selection by LQ CRT. Qualifier 'a' in MOMNT/a defines heeling angle (deg) where to calculate the moment value (default 0). loading condition table. Quantity selection by LQ LDT. minimum GM and maximum KG table Quantity selection by LQ MGM. relevant openings. Quantity selection by LQ ROP. special points. Quantity selection by LQ POI. freeboard. Quantity selection by LQ FRB. margin line. Quantity selection by LQ MRG. permissible heeling moment. Quantity selection by LQ AHM. permissible heeling moment, alternative layout. Quantity selection by LQ PHM.
CRTAB:
LDTAB: MGMTAB: ROP: POINTS: FRB: MRG: AHM: PHM: NOHEADER: opt:
do not print header line(s). CURVE=name(x-coord) (special option for LIS POINTS) intersect curve at given x-coordinates, generate special points at the intersection points and add them the set of relevant points. 'name' is name of a geometric curve or freeboard deck edge and 'x-coord' is set of x-coordinates where to intersect the curve. There are three ways to give coordinates: x1, x2, x3..., explicit set; D=step, equally spaced values over the x-range of the curve; xarr, values provided by a calculator array. standard table output options.
tab-opt:
LIST GZC MOM=name CRIT=name NOHEADER tab-opt List stability curves and other functions of heel. Quantity selection by LQ GZC. MOM=name: CRIT=name: NOHEADER: tab-opt: (opt) add the moment curve to the list. Default none. (opt) same as MOM=name but the moment is given by the name of the criterion where it appears. do not print header line(s). standard table output options.
LIST SUMM arg1,arg2 NOHEADER List two dimensional summary table(s). Quantity selection by LQ SUMM. arg1,arg2: (optional) select table arguments, arg1 for rows, arg2 for columns. Default argument selection depends on the calculation arguments in the manner shown below. The possible argument pairs are (in parentheses when it is the default selection):
102 (169)
LOAD,CRIT: CRIT,LOAD: T,CRIT: CRIT,T: TR,CRIT: CRIT,TR: T,TR: TR,T: NOHEADER:
table(s) as function of loading condition and criterion (default when there are selected loading conditions by the command LOAD) as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of draught and criterion (default when number of loading conditions is zero and number of trims is one) as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of trim and criterion (default when number of loading conditions is zero and number of draughts is one) as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of draught and trim (default when number of loading conditions is zero and number of draughts and trims is greater than one) as above but rows and columns interchanged.
do not print header line(s).
LIST WMOM MOM=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) NOHEADER tab-opt List detailed information about areas exposed to the wind. The areas and related moment data are expressed as function of wind model or profile parts and height. MOM=name: name of wind moment
(opt) useful with wind models only. Position how the structure is floating: t=draught, tr=trim angle FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim): along stability axis, heel=angle around stability axis, azim=angle of stability axis. See command WMOD for the viewing direction. NOHEADER: do not print header line(s).
LIST PROF FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) NOHEADER tab-opt LIST PROF MOM=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) NOHEADER tab-opt LIST PROF CRIT=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) NOHEADER tab-opt List information about area exposed to the wind. The first alternative is for the model defined as argument (command PROF or WMOD), the second one is for the model defined in connection with the given moment (parameter PROF=) and the third one is for the model defined in connection with the given criterion (type MINGM, REQ BY PROF). Quantity selection by LQ PRO. (opt) in connection with wind models only. Position how the structure is floating: t=draught, FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim): tr=trim angle along stability axis, heel=angle around stability axis, azim=angle of stability axis. See command WMOD for the viewing direction. LIST MARG NOH X=(x,x,...) D=d t-opt List definition points of the current margin line. The list is a table controlled by LQ MARG, ! FORM and table output options. NOH: X=(x,x,...): (opt) do not print header line. (opt) list points at given x's. Default all.
103 (169)
x:
a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series (min,max,step). Series of of values have to be given with double apostrophes e.g. X=((0 20 2) 50 70 (100 140 2))
D=d: t-opt:
list points at intervals of d meter. If d is positive, the intervals start from the aft end, if d is negative, the intervals start from the fore end. (opt) standard table output options.
LIST FRBD NOH X=(x,x,...) D=d t-opt List definition points of the current freeboard deck edge. The list is a table controlled by LQ FRBD, !FORM and table output options. NOH: X=(x,x,...): (opt) do not print header line. (opt) list points at given x's. Default all. x: a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series (min,max,step). Series of of values have to be given with double apostrophes e.g. X=((0 20 2) 50 70 (100 140 2))
D=d: t-opt: LIST AHM
List allowable heeling moments for grain criteria. Use arguments ZCG to define columns, and DISP or T to define the rows. The allowable moment values are restricted by the criteria set with RCR so that if any of the criteria fails for a certain KG/DISP combination a dash (-) will be output. LIST PHM List allowable heeling moments for grain criteria with an alternative layout. Displays the allowable moment separately for the 12 degree grain criterion and the residual area criterion (GRM/HEEL and GRM/AREA in LQ PHM). Possibility to list also the maximum KG for these criteria (insert MAXKG/HEEL and MAXKG/AREA to LQ PHM). Use arguments ZCG, and DISP or T to define the rows. LQ Select quantities Select quantities to be printed. The following selections are available: LIM - GM or KG limit curves CRT - criterion table LDT - loading condition table MGM - min. GM and max. KG table SUMM - two dim. summary tables ROP - relevant openings FRB - freeboard MRG - margin line POI special points PRO - profile MARG - definition poinst of margin line FRBD - definition poinst of freeboard deck edge GZC - points of GZ curve. AHM - allowable heeling moments for grain criteria PHM - allowable heeling moments for grain criteria, alternative layout See !EXPL LQ/GEN for LQ in general.
104 (169)
NL
Open new list Close the list and open a new one as an independent list.
NL NP New page Generate form feed. NP TAB TOO -> Enter table calculation task (TAB) Table output options Set table output control for LIS LIM, LIS CRT, LIS LDT, LIS MGM, LIS ROP, LIS FRB, LIS MRG, LIS POI, LIS PHM and LIS AHM. See !EXPL T TYPE Print text in the list The command generates a text line in the list. TYPE text text : contents of the line.
13.4 Graphic output - intact criteria

MOVE Move drawing The command moves the lower left corner of the drawing given distance. MOVE du,dv du,dv: MOVE OFF Move the lower left corner back to the original position. PLD Plot diagram This command produces graphic output using the general diagram output module. The quantities to be included are controlled with command PQ while the graphic result can be controlled with command POO. Calculation of missing data is carried out automatically; there is no need for separate calculation commands. The scope of plotting is controlled by the argument commands. PLD LIM SEP DAM=dname NAME=name POO options This command draws the GM and/or KG limit curves. The quantities T, TR and DISP may be used as arguments. The quantities GM and KG are the actual GM- and KG-values of the loading conditions selected by the argument command LOAD and the quantity LCOND contains the names of the selected loading conditions. The quantities GM, KG and LCOND are available for marking loading conditions in the diagram (use POO-options MARK, NOCURVE and TAG). moved distance horizontally and vertically. The distancies are given in the drawing coordinates.
105 (169)
SEP:
(opt) plot limit curves separately, i.e. one curve for each relevant criterion. Default: plot combined curve. The names of criteria are available from the short header. Note! This option works properly only if there is an explicit range in POO of the plot. (opt) add the limit curve of damage stability to the drawing; dname = name of the limit curve made in damage stability. Default none. Remember to select also the corresponding quantities GMLIMDA and KGLIMDA. Note that the limit curve is assumed to be made in the environment DAMAGE using the new damage stability criteria. If the limit curve cannot be found, the program tries to get the limit curve made by old damage stability criteria (PLO GMT, PLO KGT in DA). (opt) save the limit curve in the secondary data base under the given name, default GM/KG-LIM.T for the functions of draught and GM/KG-LIM.TR for the functions of trim. (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO.
DAM=dname:
NAME=name: POO: options:
PLD LDC MOM=name CRIT=name MAXNR=n POO options This command draws loading condition check plots, i.e. stability curves of loading conditions. MOM=name: CRIT=name: MAXNR=n: POO: options: (opt) add the moment curve to the diagram. Note that the moment curve is available only if it is calculated in the same run, i.e. it appears in some curretly relevant criterion. Default none. (opt) same as MOM=name but the moment is given by the name of criterion where it appears. maximum number of the most critical openings shown in the drawing. Default all. (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO.
PLD CRC cri,cri,... crt=(opt,opt,...), crt=(opt,opt,...),... MAX=nr POO opt The command makes criterion check plots, i.e. plots where criterion dependent additions are drawn on the stability curve background (stability curves drawn for the actual GM). For helping the user to add desired texts to the plots, the command assigns two array variables: CRPLDSTR for strings and CRPLDVAL for numeric values. See the documents for the contents of the arrays. cri: (opt) name of criterion to be plotted. The criterion must be currently relevant. Default: all relevant criteria.
(opt) control for additions and extra markings. These options overrule the control data given in crt=(opt,opt,...): definition of criteria. every criterion type has own set of options. The type of criterion 'crt' is one of the following alternatives: MAXGZ, MINGZ, MAXHEEL, MINAREA, MINGM, POSMAX, DOWNFLD, RANGE, VSTAB, RESFRB, RESMRG, RESFLD, ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN, DYNARM, GZRATIO. The options 'opt' must be selected from the following set: be selected from the following set: TH=h: PEN=p: HPEN=p: ID=c: text height of additional markings. Default that one selected by diagram plotting. select pen code for additions, p=logical pen code. Default P1011. select pen code for auxiliary lines (usually horizontal), p=logical pen code. Default P1011. conrol for (numeric) identification; c=ON, add standard identification (default); c=OFF, no identification; c='text', use the given text.
106 (169)
ARROW: U=u: V=v: FLL=c: FLA=c: FLB=c: FLC=c: IDA=c: IDB=c: IDC=c:
draw pointers as arrows. Default bare line. horizontal coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. Default: line is vertical. vertival coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. raster code for area filling, c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'a', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'b', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'c', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. conrol for identification area 'a'. See ID= for alternatives. conrol for identification area 'b'. See ID= for alternatives. conrol for identification area 'c'. See ID= for alternatives.
The following table shows the criterion types and the available options, + = available, - = not available. TH PEN HPEN ID ARROW U V FLL FLA FLB FLC IDA IDB IDC MAXGZ + + + + + - - MINGZ + + + + + - - GZRATIO + + + + + - - MAXHEEL + + + + + + MINAREA + + - - + MINGM + + + + + - - POSMAX + + + + + - - DOWNFLD + + + + - - RANGE + + + + + + - VSTAB + + + + + + RESFRB + + + + + - - RESMRG + + + + + - - RESFLD + + + + + - - ARATIO1 + - - + + + + ARATIO2 + - - + + + + + + RESDYN + - - + + + + DYNARM + + + + + - - POO: opt: (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO.
PLD MGM crtype=(opt,opt,...), crtype=(opt,opt,...),..., MAX=nr POO options The command makes minimum GM check plots. The check plots are same as those made by PLD CRC but the background is drawn for the minimum GM.
107 (169)
PLD PRO POO options PLD PRO MOM=name POO options PLD PRO CRIT=name POO options The command plots the lateral profile and the waterline of the loading condition. The first alternative is for the profile defined as argument (command PROF), the second one is for the profile defined in connection with the given moment (parameter PROF=) and the third one is for the profile defined in connection with the given criterion (type MINGM, REQ BY PROF). Note that the quantities ZCG and ID are available for marking in the drawing the center of area of the part above the waterline and below the waterline (use POO-options MARK, NOCURVE and TAG). POO: options: PLOT (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO. Start plotting The command starts drawings of various kinds. Calculation of missing data is carried out automatically; there is no need for separate calculation commands. The scope of plotting is controlled by the argument commands. PLOT .id Plot according to standard macro. For alternatives, use PLOT .CAT. For explanations of a given macro, use PLOT .id ?. PLOT limtype NOHEADER NAME=name NOMARK KM DAM=dname limcurve: type of limit curve, one of the following alternatives: GMLIM: GMSET: KGLIM: KGSET: NOHEADER: NAME=name: NOMARK: KM: DAM=dname: minimum GM limit curve min. GM limit curve set, i.e. limit curve for each relevant criterion maximum KG limit curve max KG limit curve set, i.e. limit curve for each relevant criterion
do not plot header line(s). save the limit curve in the secondary data base under the given name, default GM-LIM.T or KGLIM.T for the functions of draught and GM-LIM.TR or KG-LIM.TR for the functions of trim. (in connection with GMLIM and KGLIM) do not mark the limit curve points with names of determining criteria. add KM-curve to the drawing. add the limit curve of old damage stability criteria to the drawing; dname = name of the limit curve made in damage stability. If =dname is missing, the default name of damage stability is used (see DA). Note! DA generates only limit curves as function of T.
PLOT type NOHEADER NOFRAME ALL CRI=cname type: type of plot, one of the following alternatives:
108 (169)
LDCHECK: MGMCHECK: NOHEADER: NOFRAME: ALL:
loading condition check plot minimum GM check plot
do not plot header line(s) do not plot frame (in connection with LDCHECK) draw one plot for each criterion. If there are different moment arm curves connected to the criteria, this option is needed to separate different moment arm curves to different drawings. If this option and the option CRI=name are missing, the GZ curve of the loading condition and the (possible) moment arm curve of the first relevant criterion is plotted. (in connection with LDCHECK) draw the GZ curve of the loading condition and the (possible) moment arm curve of the given criterion. Set output options for diagram plotting This command controls the graphic result produces by PLD LIM, PLD LDC, PLD CRC, PLD MGM and PLD MGM. For the parameters of the command, see !EXPL POO/GEN. The subject is LIM (default), LDC, CRC, MGM or PRO.
CRI=cname:
POO
PQ
Select quantities for diagram plotting This command controls the quantities to be included in PLD LIM, PLD LDC, PLD CRC, PLD MGM and PLD PRO.
PQ subj selection subj: selection: TH (opt) subject, using the symbols listed above. Default=LIM. the syntax is the same as in the standard command (see !EXPL PQ/GEN). Text height The height of texts not controlled otherwise is defined by this command. Without parameter, the current height is displayed. TH h h: height of text in the ship scale. A preceding asterisk defines text height directly in the dimensions of the drawing. Set horizontal range for plots Set minimum and maximum limit for the plot in the horizontal direction. Default extreme limits of the plot. URANGE umin,umax umin: umax: USCALE minimum coordinate maximum coordinate. Set scale for horizontal axis Use the given scale horizontally. Default: suitable scale to fit in the drawing area. USCALE s
URANGE
109 (169)
s: VRANGE
scale in the forms 0.01 or 1/100. Set vertical range for plots Set minimum and maximum limit for the plot in the vertical direction. Default extreme limits of the plot.
VRANGE vmin,vmax vmin: vmax: VSCALE minimum coordinate maximum coordinate. Set scale for vertical axis Use the given scale vertically. Default: suitable scale to fit in the drawing area. VSCALE s s: scale in the forms 0.01 or 1/100.
13.5 Auxiliary functions - intact criteria

CAT List catalog of stored data The command lists names of stored data of the given type. CAT type type: type of data, one of the alternatives: CRI: CGR: MOM: OPE: OGR: POI: FRB: BIL: MAR: LOA: CAT CRI DB1 CAT CGR DB1 CAT MOM DB1 List catalog of criteria, criterion groups or moments in the project data base. CAT CRI SYSDB stability criteria criterion groups heeling moment curves openings opening groups special points freeboard deck edges bilge curves margin lines loading conditions.
110 (169)
CAT CGR SYSDB CAT MOM SYSDB List catalog of criteria, criterion groups or moments in the system data base. CAT CRI NAPADB CAT CGR NAPADB CAT MOM NAPADB List catalog of criteria, criterion groups or moments in the NAPA data base. DES List data in input format The command lists the given data in the input format. DES type name,name,... type: type of data, one of the alternatives: CRI: CGR: MOM: OPE: OGR: POI: FRB: BIL: MAR: name: stability criterion criterion group heeling moment curve opening opening group special point freeboard deck edge bilge curve margin line
name of data item. If type is CRI and name is name of a criterion group, all criteria belonging to the group are displayed. If a criterion. moment or criterion group is stored in several data bases, the data base unit may be specified by using format 'name/unit', where unit is PROJDB or DB1 or 1 for the project data base, SYSDB or DB2 or 2 for the system data base and NAPADB or DB7 or 7 for the NAPA data base.
DES type ALL Display all data found in the data bases. The data base may be specified as with the name (see above). EDI Edit data in input format The command goes to the editor displaying the given data in the input format and the user has opportunity to edit data. EDI type name,name,... type: type of data, one of the alternatives: CRI: CGR: stability criterion criterion group
111 (169)
MOM: OPE: OGR: POI: FRB: BIL: MAR: name:
heeling moment curve opening opening group special point freeboard deck edge bilge curve margin line
EDI type ALL Display all data found in the data bases. The data base may be specified as with the name (see above). END Finish CR The command finishes CR and returns to the calling level (task level or LD). ENV Change environment The command changes the working environment from intact stability to damage stability or from damage stability to intact stability. Changing of environment is allowed only if CR is entered from the task level. ENV DAMAGE Change environment from intact stability to damage stability. ENV INTACT Change environment from damage stability to intact stability. LD -> enter loading conditions task (LD) The command returns the control back to LD if CR was called from LD, otherwise the program returns to the task level. OK Finish CR The command finishes CR and returns to the calling level (task level or LD). Synonym of END. SCAN -> enter list scanner (IOF). For more details, see !EXPL SCAN/GEN. SCAN SEND just sends the list to the printer. Note: the current result list will be closed. SRV -> enter services subtask
112 (169)
UNS
Unsave data The given data items are removed from the data base.
UNS type name type: type of data, one of the alternatives: CRI: CGR: MOM: OPE: OGR: POI: FRB: BIL: MAR: name: name of data item. stability criterion criterion group heeling moment curve opening opening group special point freeboard deck edge bilge curve margin line
13.6 Arguments - damage criteria

ARG Argument handling The command lists, stores and restores arguments. ARG List current arguments. ARG SAVE name text Save the current arguments in the project data base as named set. name: text: ARG GET name Assign arguments from the stored set. name: ARG CAT List catalog of stored argument sets. ARG UNS name Unsave argument set. name: AZI name of the set. Azimuth angle name of the set. name of the set. (optional) descriptive text. This text will be shown by CAT ARG.
113 (169)
The command defines the stability axis other than the x-axis that will be used in all calculations of local initial conditions. All stability quantities are calculated in the plane perpendicular to the stability axis. The input and output heeling angles are interpreted as angles around the stability axis and input and output trims are trims along the stability axis if not otherwise stated. Note that this argument has no effect on the initial conditions defined in DA. AZI a a: azimuth angle (deg). The stability axis makes an angle 'a' with the x-axis on the xy-plane. 'a' is positive towards the +y-axis and negative towards the -y-axis. Current bilge curve Select the current bilge curve. Bilge curve is used for calculation of heeling angle at which the bilge comes out of water (criterion MAXHEEL, alternative BILGE). CBIL name Use the bilge curve defined by BILGE. CBIL TG=tg Instead of a bilge curve, approximate the bilge by a point where the tangent of the mid frame makes an angle of tg degrees with the y-axis. TG=tg: inclination of tangent (degrees).
CBILGE
CBIL POS=(x,y,z) Instead of a bilge curve, approximate the bilge by the given point. POS=(x,y,z): CBIL OFF No current bilge curve. CBIL The command without parameters returns the current bilge curve or approximation. CFRB Current freeboard deck edge Select the current freeboard deck edge. The freeboard deck edge is used for calculation of quantities related to the freeboard. CFRB name Use the freeboard deck edge defined by FRB. name: CFRB H=h Use a height approximation instead of the freeboard deck edge curve. The height approximation equals to the point in the mid frame at height h. H=h: CFRB OFF No current freeboard deck edge. height (m). name of freeboard deck edge. coordinates of the point.
114 (169)
CFRB The command without parameters returns the current freeboard deck edge. CMAR Current margin line Select the current margin line. The margin line is used for calculation of quantities related to the margin line. CMAR name Use the named line. The margin line must be defined by the command 'MARG name'. CMAR OFF No current margin line. DAM Select damage cases The command selects the damage cases to be treated in this run. Calculation and output is carried out for all initial condition - damage case combinations got from the arguments. The damage cases must be defined in the damage stability subsystem. DAM name,name,... name: DAM NONE DAM Make the set empty. DAM The command without parameters lists the current selection. GM GM for local initial conditions GM value(s) for the initial condition(s) defined locally (initial defined by draught, trim and GM or KG). GM gm gm: GM (m), same value for all local initial conditions. Default value 0.15 m. name of damage case or damage case group.
GM t,gm t,gm ... GM as a function of draught. For every local initial condition, GM is calculated from the curve by linear interpolation. If draught of the local initial condition is outside the curve, GM of the first or last point is used. t,gm: HEEL HEEL a,a,... a: HULL heeling angle (deg), single value or serie (NAPA standard format). Calculation hull draught and corresponding GM. Draughts must be in ascending order. Heeling angles
115 (169)
HULL name name: ICR name of hull, default = dam. hull from the reference system. Irrelevant criteria Remove the given criteria from the set of relevant criteria. ICR crit,crit,... crit: ICR ALL All criteria are irrelevant, i.e. the set of relevant criteria is empty. INIT Select initial conditions The command selects the initial conditions to be treated in this run. Calculation and output is carried out for all initial condition - damage case combinations got from the arguments. The initial conditions must be defined in the damage stability subsystem. Note! If one wants to treat initial conditions defined by draught, trim and GM, there must be no selected initial condition (if necessary call INIT NONE). INIT name,name,... name: INIT NONE INIT Make the set empty. The set must be empty for making it possible to treat the initial conditions defined by draught, trim and GM. INIT The command without parameters lists the current selection. IPO Irrelevant points Remove the given points from the set of relevant special points. IPO name,name,... name: IPO ALL All points are irrelevant, i.e. the set of relevant points is empty. IRO Irrelevant openings Remove the given openings from the set of relevant openings. IRO name,name,... name: IRO ALL All openings are irrelevant, i.e. the set of relevant openings is empty. name of opening or opening group. name of opening. name of initial condition or initial condition group. name of criterion or name of criterion group.
116 (169)
IRO EXTERNAL All relevant openings connecting the sea to a compartment. IRO INTERNAL All relevant openings connecting two compartments. IRO PIPE All relevant openings of type pipe (OTYPE PIPE). ITOL Change iteration tolerance The minimum GM (max. KG) which is in compliance with the criterion is calculated by an iterative method. Iteration is terminated if the iteration step of GM is less than tolerance (default 5 mm) or the difference between the required and attained value is less than tolerance which depends on quantity (default for metric quantities 1 mm, for angle quantities 0.1 deg, for area quantities 0.0001 mrad and for area ratio quantities 0.01 = 1 %). ITOL alt=tol,alt=tol,... alt=tol: any of the following five alternatives (tol > 0): GM=tol: M=tol: DEG=tol: MRAD=tol: RATIO=tol: tolerance for iteration step of GM (m) tolerance for metric quantities (m) tolerance for angle quantities (deg) tolerance for area quantities (mrad) tolerance for area ratio quantities (ratio, dimensionless).
If one changes the tolerance of the iteration step of GM, but does not change some quantity tolerance which has not been changed never before, the quantity tolerance follows the GMtolerance in the following way: tol = gmtol/5 for metric quantities, tol = 20*gmtol for angle quantities, tol = gmtol/50 for area quantities and tol = 2*gmtol for area ratio quantities. KG KG for local initial conditions KG value(s) for the initial condition(s) defined locally (initial defined by draught, trim and GM or KG). KG kg kg: KG (m), same value for all local initial conditions.
KG t,kg t,kg ... KG as a function of draught. For every local initial condition, KG is calculated from the curve by linear interpolation. If draught of the local initial condition is outside the curve, KG of the first or last point is used. t,kg: LOA draught and corresponding KG. Draughts must be in ascending order. Select loading conditions for marking The loading conditions selected by this command are plotted to the limit curve drawings, if related quantities are selected by PQ. Calculations are never based on this selection, but on the selected initial conditions (command INIT).
117 (169)
LOA name,name,... name: LOA NONE Make the set empty. LOA The command without parameters lists the current selection. MODE Calculation mode for results The command defines the modes how to calculate cases and how to display results. MODE alt,... alt: mode alternative. There are nine possible modes: CDISP: VDISP: STEP: treat GZ-curves by the constant displacement method treat GZ-curves by the variable displacement method steps occur at angles of downflooding, i.e. the flooding stage PROGRESSIVE will be calculated (OPT PROGRESSIVE in damage stability) there are no steps due to downflooding replace steel reductions of damaged liquid load rooms by permeabilities in flooded conditions do not replace steel reductions of damaged liquid load rooms by permeabilities in flooded conditions the ship is forced to list to the starboard side the ship is forced to list to the port side the program selects the listing side automaticly depending on the relative position of the center of gravity and center of buoyancy in the upright or, if the range of calculation heeling angles extends from the negative side to the positive side, both PS and SB sides are calculated. Keep results in the data base removing them from the memory immediately after use. This option ensures large runs also in small computers (default). Keep results in the memory during whole run without removing them after use. This option may be used if connection to the data base is slow and there is enough memory space in the computer to keep all results in the memory at the same time. name of loading condition or loading condition group.
NOSTEP: PERM: NOPERM: SB: PS: AUTO:
DB:
MEM:
NITER
Maximum number of iterations The minimum GM (max. KG) which is in compliance with the criterion is calculated by an iterative method. To prevent endless loops, there is maximum number of iterations. By this command the maximum number may be changed.
NITER n
118 (169)
n: NPASS
number of iterations, default 100. Number of passengers Number of passengers is used in calculation of moment caused by crowding of passengers. The number given explicitly in the moment definition overrules this data.
NPASS n n: OPARR number of passengers. Opening arrangement A table based way to define all openings available in the task. The opening arrangement is a table with prefix OPE*, each row defining an opening. If an opening arrangement is active, all separately defined openings are ignored as well as the commands OPENING, EDI OPE, DEL OPE and COPY OPE. The commands CAT OPE, DES OPE, ROP, IRO and OGROUP work normally. OPARR name Activate the table OPE*name as an opening arrangement. name: OPARR OFF Deactivate the opening arrangement (the openings defined by the task OPEN become available). Columns of the arrangement: ID: DES: WT: identification of the opening description of the opening watertightness of opening. Type of opening regarding its severity in progressive flooding. The alternatives: UNPROTECTED WEATHERTIGHT WATERTIGHT must not submerged partly watertight totally watertight name of table without prefix OPE*.
UNNOPROGRESSIVE (in DA only) unprotected but in the stage PROGRESSIVE no new compartment is flooded through it. WEPROGRESSIVE (in DA only) weathertight but in the stage PROGRESSIVE new compartment may be flooded through it.
x-, y- and z-coordinate of the opening (check point of immersion). REFX,REFY,REFZ: FR: CONN: x-coordinate of opening as frame number Pair of compartments connected by the opening. The syntax comp1,comp2 defines the connection in both directions, the syntax comp1 -> comp2 defines one-directional connection from comp1 to comp2. Either of the names may be SEA. In DA, the current relevancy of the opening is checked by the following logic: The opening is relevant if (provided it is not watertight) it leads from the sea to an intact compartment it leads from a damaged compartment to an intact compartment
119 (169)
connection information is missing The opening is irrelevant if
it leads to a damaged compartment it connects two intact compartments it leads to the sea and the connection is one-directional it leads from an intact compartment and the connection is one-directional
OTYPE: STAGE:
type of opening as construction, like door, escape, pipe etc. flooding stage where the opening is taken into account. The column defines the stage(s) where the opening is taken into account in calculation of probabilistic damage stability for SOLAS II-1. The factor s will be zero if the opening is immersed in the specified stage (default: the final stage). Alternatives: 'name of stage', ALL (all stages) or FINAL (the last stage). Fillig colour(s) of opening in plotting tasks DRW FLO and DRW OPEN of DA. Up to four logical fill codes col1 col2 col3 col4 may be given : col1 = opening has become irrelevant and above the water line, default GREEN; col2 = opening is relevant and above the water line, default GREEN; col3 = opening has become irrelevant and is under the water line, default RED; opening is relevant and under the water line, default RED. size of the square marker in plotting tasks DRW FLO and DRW OPEN of DA. A preceding asterisk defines the size directly in the dimensions of the drawing otherwise it is in the ship scale. Text position in x-, y- and z-sections relative to the center of the marker representing the opening. The following alternatives are available: AL: AC: AR: L: O: R: UL: UC: UR: above, to the left above, centered above, to the right to the left over to the right under, to the left under, centered under, to the right
COL:
SIZE: TPX,TPY,TPZ:
PBAL
Add permanent ballast The command adds permanent ballast to a set of tanks. The permanent ballast will be used in all calculations and it behaves like normal load.
PBAL baltab Add permanent ballast to the tanks as defined in the table 'baltab'. baltab: name of a table containing the column TANK for name of tank, column VOL and/or FILL for volume (m3) or filling (%) of contents and column DENS for density (t/m3) of ballast. Example:
120 (169)
Definition of table NEW TAB*PERBAL COL, TANK COL, VOL COL, FILL COL, DENS Contents of table TANK VOL FILL DENS NM
---------------------------R10 R11 R401 PBAL OFF Remove permanent ballast. PROF Profile Name of the default profile curve used in wind moment calculations and in criterion MINGM, REQ BY PROF. The profile given explicitly in definition of the moment or criterion, overrules this data. PROF name NOCL Profile consists of one curve. name: NOCL: name of the curve representing the whole profile (option) do not add containers to the lateral profile. 100.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.025 50.0 1.025 50.0 1.025
PROF (name,name,...) NOCL Profile consists of many different curves. name: NOCL: name of curve representing one part of the profile (option) do not add containers to the lateral profile.
PROF (name,c,name,c,...) NOCL Profile consists of many different parts, each part weighted by the related coefficient. name: c: name of curve representing one part of the profile for wind heeling moment calculation, the portion of lateral area that is above the waterline is multiplied by the dimensionless coefficient c. These coefficients are used, for instance, if there are different wind forces at different heights or different profile parts need different shape coefficients. (option) do not add containers to the lateral profile.
NOCL:
121 (169)
PROF OFF No profile. RCR Relevant criteria Define the set of relevant criteria. The command replaces the current set by the given set of criteria. Note that definition of damage cases may contain changes to this set. RCR crit,crit,... crit: RCR ALL All criteria stored in the data base are relevant. RCR The command without parameters lists the set of relevant criteria. RHO RHO r r: ROP density (t/m3). Relevant openings Define the set of relevant openings. The command replaces the current set by the given set of openings. Only the relevant openings contribute to calculation of downflooding angle and reserve to downflooding. Note that definition of damage cases may contain changes to this set. ROP name,name,... name: ROP ALL All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement. ROP EXTERNAL All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement connecting the sea to a compartment. ROP INTERNAL All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement connecting two compartments. ROP PIPE All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement of type pipe (OTYPE PIPE). ROP The command without parameters lists the set of relevant openings. RPO Relevant points name of opening or opening group. Seawater density name of criterion or name of criterion group. If the criterion or group cannot be found in the project data base, it is tried to find in the system data base.
122 (169)
Define the set of relevant special points. The command replaces the current set by the given set of points. The relevant special points are used for calculation of one alternative of criterion MAXHEEL (req. POINT) and their positions relative to the waterline may be checked. RPO name,name,... name: RPO ALL All points stored in the data base are relevant. RPO The command without parameters lists the set of relevant points. T Draught for local initial condition Draught(s) for the initial condition(s) defined locally (initial condition(s) defined by draught, trim and GM). T t,t... t: draught (m), single value or series (NAPA standard format). Default set (0.6*tdwl,1.1*tdwl,0.1*tdwl), tdwl = design waterline from the reference system. Trims for local initial conditions Trims for the initial conditions defined locally (initial conditions defined by draught, trim and GM or KG). An alternative way to give trims is the command TRA. TR tr,tr... tr: TRA trim (m), single value or series (NAPA standard format). Default 0. Trim angles for local initial conditions Trim angles for the initial conditions defined locally (initial conditions defined by draught, trim and GM or KG). An alternative way to give trims is the command TR. TRA tr,tr... tr: VF trim angle (deg), single value or series (NAPA standard format). Default 0. Full speed Default full speed to be used in turning moment calculation by USSR rules. The speed given explicitly in the moment definition overrules this data. VF v v: VS full speed (m/s). Service speed Default service speed to be used in turning moment calculation by IMO. The speed given explicitly in the moment definition overrules this data. VS v name of point.
TR
123 (169)
v: WMOD
service speed (m/s). Wind model Name of table defining 3-dimensional wind model used in wind moment calculations and in criterion MINGM, REQ BY PROF. The wind model is used instead of the profile wherever the program refers to the area exposed to the wind and it overrules the argument PROF. The projected area exposed to the wind and the lateral area of the water resistance changes according to trim, heel and wind direction relative to the floating structure.
WMOD name dir name: name of table defining the wind model. The table should have the columns NAME, COEF, WRCOEF and SIDE. The column NAME contains the names of surfaces of the model and the column COEF contains corresponding shape coefficients for the areas exposed to the wind. The column WRCOEF defines the water resistance coefficients for the underwater body. The column SIDE tells which one side of the surface is exposed to the wind. The alternatives are O = outside, I = inside and B = both sides. B should be used for surfaces having no volume and which are exposed to the wind on both sides. The default side may be given by quantity SIDE: QNT SIDE s. If this is missing, the program default is O. (option) wind direction relative to the structure (deg). The default direction is perpendicular to the stability axis. The wind direction makes an angle 'dir' with the y-axis so that if dir=0, wind blows from the -y-axis and 'dir' grows towards the +x-axis.
dir:
13.7 List output - damage criteria

ASG Assign variables The command assigns sets of variables related to different environments and connections. Note that the variables keep their values until the next assignment command despite changes in arguments has been done, there is no automatic update of variables. For the names, description and indexing of variables, see the manual CR.2, chapter 3.5. ASG env INTACT CURVE=name(x-coord) Assign variables related to the given environment. If the environment contains variables needing calculated results, missing data is automaticly generated and out-of-date data is automaticly updated. env: environment defining the set of variables to be created. ARG: CALC: DLIM: DCRT: DLDT: DMGM: DROP: variables related to calculation arguments variables related to hydrostatics and stability of damage cases variables related to the GM- and KG-limit curves (same contents as in LIST DLIM) variables related to the criterion table (same contents as in LIST DCRT) variables related to the loading condition table (same contents as in LIST DLDT) variables related to the minimum GM and maximum KG table (same contents as in LIST DMGM) variables related to the relevant openings (same contents as in LIST DROP)
124 (169)
DFRB: DMRG: DPOI: DPRO:
variables related to the freeboard (same contents as in LIST DFRB) variables related to the margin line (same contents as in LIST DMRG) variables related to the special points (same contents as in LIST DPOI) variables related to the area exposed to the wind (same contents as in LIST DPRO). The model data (profile or wind model) is taken from the arguments unless the option MOM=name or CRIT=name is given in which case data is taken from the given moment or criterion. set ON mode in which intermediate calculation results (e.g. lateral area above wl) are stored in variables. The set of variables and their contents depend on the path along which calculation proceeds, i.e. what is asked to calculate and in which order (see the manual!). assignment of intermediate result variables is set OFF.
ON:
OFF: INTACT: CUR=name(xcoord):
(opt.) add values of initial conditions to the arrays. (special option for LIST DPOI) intersect curve at given x-coordinates, generate special at the intersection points and add them to listing. name: x-coord: name of a geometric curve or freeboard deck edge x-coordinates where to intersect the curve. There are three ways to give coordinates: x1, x2, x3,...explicit set; D=step, equally spaced values over the x-range of the curve; xarr, values provided by a calculator array.
ASG DEL Delete all CR-variables. CALC Generate result description for specified list The command generates the result description of the specified list type, i.e. the description which contains all the quantities which are available in connection with listing. Also the command LIST generates the same description. CALC implies forced recalculation of results. CALC ltype INTACT ltype: type of list (same as in the command list): DLIM: DCRT: DLDT: DMGM: DROP: DPOI: DFRB: DMRG: DPRO: GM and KG limit curves, description RES*LIMTABLE criterion table, description RES*CRTABLE loading condition table, description RES*LDTABLE minimum GM and maximum KG table, description RES*MGMTABLE relevant openings, description RES*OPENINGS special points, description RES*POINTS freeboard, description RES*FRB margin line, description RES*MARGIN lateral profile, description RES*PROFILE. The profile data is taken from the arguments unless the option MOM=name or CRIT=name is given in which case data is taken from the given moment or criterion.
125 (169)
INTACT:
(opt.) add values of initial conditions to the results.
CALC DSUM arg1,arg2 INTACT Generate result description for summary tables, name of description RES*SUMTABLE. arg1,arg2: INTACT: FIGURE (optional) argument selection, see explanations for LIST. (opt.) take into account contribution of the initial conditions. Insert figure into the result list The command allows a stored drawing or currently made graphic output to be added to the output list. FIG * SIZE du dv, pos This form inserts the last graphic component made in CR. In order to make this possible, graphic output must be directed to the intermediate file (!GR F or !GR +F), and the drawing concerned must be either currently open, or closed but without a new being opened. The result from the PLOT command is always closed, while the command EDR is needed for plots made by DRW and SETUP. FIG name ... This form inserts a drawing stored in the data base. For more detailed information about this form, see !EXPL FIG/GEN. LF Empty line(s) The commands adds empty lines to the result list, either a specified number or to a given position. LF Add one empty line. LF n Add n empty lines. LF TO n ! Add lines to reach specified position on page. See !EXPL LF/GEN. LIST Start listing The command starts listings of various kinds. Calculation of missing data is carried out automatically; there is no need for separate calculation commands. The scope of listing is controlled by the argument commands, contents of listing is controlled by the quantity selection command LQ and layout is controlled by the table output options and format control command ! FOR. LIST .id List according to standard macro. For alternatives, use LIST .CAT. For explanations of a given macro, use LIST .id ?. LIST ltype init/dam sco-opt NOHEADER INTACT MAX=nr CUR=name(x-coord), tab-opt ltype: type of list, one of the following alternatives:
126 (169)
DLIM:
GM and KG limit curves. For each argument trim, there is one curve as function of draught (option TFUN, default) or for each argument draught, there is one curve as function of trim (option TRFUN) Quantity selection by LQ DLIM. criterion table. Quantity selection by LQ DCRT. Qualifier 'a' in MOMNT/ a defines heeling angle (deg) where to calculate the moment value (default 0). loading condition table. Quantity selection by LQ DLDT. minimum GM and maximum KG table. Quantity selection by LQ DMGM. relevant openings. Quantity selection by LQ DROP. special points. Quantity selection by LQ DPOI. freeboard. Quantity selection by LQ DFRB. margin line. Quantity selection by LQ DMRG. stability curves and other functions of heel. The option MOM=name specifies which moment curve, if any, is added to the list. Quantity selection by LQ DGZC.
DCRT:
DLDT: DMGM: DROP: DPOI: DFRB: DMRG: DGZC:
init/dam:
(optional) cases about which data is put out. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments. init: dam: initial condition or initial condition group damage case or damage case group
sco-opt: NOHEADER: INTACT:
(opt.) standard scope options of DA, see !EXPL LIST GEN in DA. (opt.) do not print extra header line(s) (if any). Table headers are controlled by TOO. (opt.) add results of the intact ship to the lists. Normally, only the results of the flooding conditions are shown and contributing to the limiting GM or KG values. This option adds to the lists a new stage called INTACT showing the values of the initial conditions. Contribution of the minimum GM and maximum KG values of the initial conditions to the limiting GM and KG values are taken into account. (optional) for LIST DROP and LIST DPOI only. List data about nr most critical opening/point, default all. The relevant openings or points are sorted acc. to the angle of immersion and nr most critical is put out. (special option for LIST DPOI) intersect curve at given x-coordinates, generate special at the intersection points and add them to listing. name: x-coord: name of a geometric curve or freeboard deck edge x-coordinates where to intersect the curve. There are three ways to give coordinates: x1, x2, x3,...explicit set; D=step, equally spaced values over the x-range of the curve; xarr, values provided by a calculator array.
MAX=nr:
CUR=name(xcoord):
tab-opt:
standard table output options.
LIST DSUM init/dam arg1,arg2 NOHEADER INTACT List two dimensional summary table(s). Quantity selection by LQ DSUM.
127 (169)
init/dam:
arg1,arg2:
(optional) select table arguments, arg1 for rows, arg2 for columns. Default argument selection depends on the calculation arguments in the manner shown below. The possible argument pairs are (in parentheses when it is the default selection): LOAD,CRIT: CRIT,LOAD: T,CRIT: CRIT,T: TR,CRIT: CRIT,TR: T,TR: TR,T: LOAD,DAM: DAM,LOAD: DAM,T: T,DAM: DAM,TR: TR,DAM: DAM,CRIT: CRIT,DAM: table(s) as function of initial condition and criterion (default when there are selected initial conditions by the command INIT) as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of draught and criterion (default when number of initial conditions is zero and number of trims is one) as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of trim and criterion (default when number of initial conditions is zero and number of draughts is one) as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of draught and trim (default when number of initial conditions is zero and number of draughts and trims is greater than one) as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of initial condition and damage case as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of damage case and draught as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of damage case and trim as above but rows and columns interchanged table(s) as function of damage case and criterion as above but rows and columns interchanged.
NOHEADER: INTACT:
(opt.) do not print header line(s). (opt.) take into account contribution of the minimum GM and maximum KG values of the initial conditions.
LIST WMOM init/dam MOM=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) NOHEADER tab-opt List detailed information about areas exposed to the wind. The areas and related moment data are expressed as function of wind model or profile parts and height. init/dam: (optional) cases about which data is put out. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments or FLP defines the floating position. init: dam: initial condition or initial condition group damage case or damage case group
128 (169)
MOM=name:
name of wind moment
(opt) useful with wind models only. Position how the structure is floating (default staedy FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim): equilibrium): t=draught, tr=trim angle along stability axis, heel=angle around stability axis, azim=angle of stability axis. See command WMOD for the viewing direction. NOHEADER: (opt.) do not print header line(s).
LIST DPROF init/dam FLP=(t,tr,heel,az) NOHEADER INTACT tab-opt LIST DPROF init/dam MOM=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,az) NOHEADER INTACT tab-opt LIST DPROF init/dam CRIT=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,az) NOHEADER INTACT tab-opt List information about area exposed to the wind. The first alternative is for the model defined as argument (command PROF or WMOD), the second one is for the model defined in connection with the given moment (parameter PROF=) and the third one is for the model defined in connection with the given criterion (type MINGM, REQ BY PROF). Quantity selection by LQ DPRO. init/dam: (optional) cases about which data is put out. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments or FLP defines the floating position. init: dam: initial condition or initial condition group damage case or damage case group
(opt) in connection with wind models only. Position how the structure is floating: t=draught, FLP=(t,tr,heel,az): tr=trim angle along stability axis, heel=angle around stability axis, az=angle of stability axis. See command WMOD for the viewing direction. If FLP is given, init/dam is ignored. NOHEADER: INTACT: (opt.) do not print header line(s). (opt.) add results of the initial conditions to the list.
LIST MARG NOH X=(x,x,...) D=d t-opt List definition points of the current margin line. The list is a table controlled by LQ MARG, ! FORM and table output options. NOH: X=(x,x,...): (opt) do not print header line. (opt) list points at given x's. Default all. x: a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series (min,max,step). Series of of values have to be given with double apostrophes e.g. X=((0 20 2) 50 70 (100 140 2))
D=d: t-opt:
LIST FRBD NOH X=(x,x,...) D=d t-opt List definition points of the current freeboard deck edge. The list is a table controlled by LQ FRBD, !FORM and table output options. NOH: (opt) do not print header line.
129 (169)
X=(x,x,...):
(opt) list points at given x's. Default all. x: a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series (min,max,step). Series of of values have to be given with double apostrophes e.g. X=((0 20 2) 50 70 (100 140 2))
D=d: t-opt: LQ
list points at intervals of d meter. If d is positive, the intervals start from the aft end, if d is negative, the intervals start from the fore end. (opt) standard table output options. Select quantities Select quantities to be printed. The following selections are available: DLIM - GM or KG limit curves DCRT - criterion table DLDT - loading condition table DMGM - min. GM and max. KG table DSUM - two dim. summary tables DROP - relevant openings DFRB - freeboard DMRG - margin line DPOI - special points DPRO - profile. See ! EXPL LQ/GEN for LQ in general.
NL
Open new list Close the list and open a new one as an independent list.
NL NP New page Generate form feed. NP TAB TOO -> Enter table calculation task (TAB) Table output options Set table output control for LIS DLIM, LIS DCRT, LIS DLDT, LIS DMGM, LIS DROP, LIS DFRB, LIS DMRG and LIS DPOI. See !EXPL TOO/GEN. TYPE Print text in the list The command generates a text line in the list. TYPE text text : contents of the line.
13.8 Graphic output - damage criteria

PLD Plot diagram This command produces graphic output using the general diagram output module. The quantities to be included are controlled with command PQ while the graphic result can be controlled with
130 (169)
command POO. Calculation of missing data is carried out automatically; there is no need for separate calculation commands. The scope of plotting is controlled by the argument commands. PLD DLIM init/dam SEP=alt INLIM=iname NAME=name INTACT POO opt This command draws the GM and/or KG limit curves. The quantities T, TR and DISP may be used as arguments. The quantities GM and KG are the actual GM- and KG-values of the loading conditions selected by the argument command LOAD and the quantity LCOND contains the names of the selected loading conditions. The quantities GM, KG and LCOND are available for marking loading conditions in the diagram (use POO-options MARK, NOCURVE and TAG). init/dam: (optional) cases about which data is put out. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments. init: dam: SEP=alt: initial condition or initial condition group damage case or damage case group
(opt) plot limit curves separately. Default: plot combined curve. Note! This option works properly only if there is an explicit range in POO of the plot. SEP=DAM: SEP=CRI: SEP: Plot one limit curve for each damage case. The names of damage cases are available from the short header. Plot one limit curve for each criterion. The names of criteria are available from the short header. Plot all curves separately, i.e. one curve for all combinations of damage cases, stages, phases, sides and criteria.
INLIM=iname:
(opt) add the limit curve of intact stability to the drawing; iname = name of the limit curve made in the environment INTACT. Default none. Remember to select also the corresponding quantities GMLIMIN and KGLIMIN. (opt) save the limit curve in the secondary data base under the given name, default GM/KGDALIM.T for the functions of draught and GM/KG-DALIM.TR for the functions of trim. (opt.) take into account contribution of initial conditions to the limiting values. (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO.
NAME=name: INTACT: POO: opt:
PLD DCRC init/dam INIT=ini, DAM=dam, STAGE=stg, PHASE=pha, SIDE=s, CRIT=cri, crt=(opt,opt,...), crt=(opt,opt,...),... OPE=(op,op...), MAX=nr INTACT POO opt The command makes criterion check plots, i.e. drawings where criterion dependent additions are drawn on the stability curve background (stability curves drawn for the actual GM). For helping the user to add desired texts to the plots, the command assigns two array variables: CRPLDSTR for strings and CRPLDVAL for numeric values. See the documents for the contents of the arrays. init/dam: (optional) cases about which data is put out. If this data is missing, initial conditions and damage cases are taken from the arguments. init: dam: INIT=ini: initial condition or initial condition group damage case or damage case group
(opt.) names of initial conditions to be drawn, default all from the arguments. One initial condition is given as INIT=name, several as INIT=(name,name,...).
131 (169)
DAM=dam: STAGE=stg:
(opt.) names of damage cases to be drawn, default all from the arguments. One damage case is given as DAM=name, several as DAM=(name,name,...). (opt.) names of stages to be drawn, default all of the damage case(s). One stage is given as STAGE=stg, several as STAGE=(stg,stg,...). The initial condition is called stage INTACT and the stage when downflooding takes place is called PROGRESSIVE. (opt.) names of phases to be drawn, default all phases of all stages. One phase is given as PHASE=pha, several as PHASE=(pha,pha,...). Phases are called 1, 2, 3, ... and the last phase EQ (equilibrium). (opt.) name of listing side, default both (provided both are calculated). Alternatives of s are PS and SB. (opt) names of criteria to be plotted. The criteria must be currently relevant. Default: all relevant criteria. One criterion is given as CRIT=name, several as CRIT=(name,name,...).
PHASE=pha:
SIDE=s: CRIT=cri:
(opt) control for additions and extra markings. These options overrule the control data given in crt=(opt,opt,...): definition of criteria. Because additions depend on the type of the criterion, every criterion type has own set of options. The type of criterion 'crt' is one of the following alternatives: MAXGZ, MINGZ, MAXHEEL, MINAREA, MINGM, POSMAX, DOWNFLD, RANGE, VSTAB, RESFRB, RESMRG, RESFLD, ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN, DYNARM, GZRATIO. The options 'opt' must be selected from the following set: TH=h: PEN=p: HPEN=p: ID=c: ARROW: U=u: V=v: FLL=c: FLA=c: FLB=c: FLC=c: IDA=c: IDB=c: IDC=c: text height of additional markings. Default that one selected by diagram plotting. select pen code for additions, p=logical pen code. Default P1011. select pen code for auxiliary lines (usually horizontal), p=logical pen code. Default P1011. conrol for (numeric) identification; c=ON, add standard identification (default); c=OFF, no identification; c='text', use the given text. draw pointers as arrows. Default bare line. horizontal coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. Default: line is vertical. vertival coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. raster code for area filling, c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'a', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'b', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. raster code for filling area 'c', c<0 means colour. Default 1001. conrol for identification area 'a'. See ID= for alternatives. conrol for identification area 'b'. See ID= for alternatives. conrol for identification area 'c'. See ID= for alternatives.
The following table shows the criterion types and the available options, + = available, - = not available. TH PEN HPEN ID ARROW U V FLL FLA FLB FLC IDA IDB IDC MAXGZ + + + + + - - MINGZ + + + +
132 (169)
+ - - GZRATIO + + + MINGM + + RANGE - + - + + + + -
+ +
+ - - MAXHEEL + + + + + + +
+ -
+ + + MINAREA + -
+ - POSMAX + -
+ - - DOWNFLD + + + + + RESFRB + + + + - - ARATIO1 + + + + - - + DYNARM + + + + -
+ VSTAB -
+ - - RESMRG + + + - - + ARATIO2 + + + - + -
+ - - RESFLD + + + + + - - + RESDYN + -
+ -
+ -
+ +
(opt) add the given openings to the drawings. OPE=(op,op,...): op: name of opening, name of opening group or ALL. If there is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may be omitted. Default all relevant openings.
MAX=nr: INTACT: POO: opt:
show nr first openings. Default all. (opt.) add initial conditions to the set of drawings. (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO.
PLD DMGM init/dam INIT=ini, DAM=dam, STAGE=stg, PHASE=pha, SIDE=s, CRIT=cri, crt=(opt,opt,...), crt=(opt,opt,...),... OPE=(op,op,...), MAX=nr INTACT POO opt The command makes minimum GM check plots. The check plots are same as those made by PLD DCRC but the background is drawn for the minimum GM. PLD DPRO init/dam POO options PLD DPRO init/dam MOM=name POO options PLD DPRO init/dam CRIT=name POO options The command plots the lateral profile and the waterline of the loading condition. The first alternative is for the profile defined as argument (command PROF), the second one is for the profile defined in connection with the given moment (parameter PROF=) and the third one is for the profile defined in connection with the given criterion (type MINGM, REQ BY PROF). Note that the quantities ZCG and ID are available for marking in the drawing the center of area of the part above the waterline and below the waterline (use POO-options MARK, NOCURVE and TAG). The waterline which divides
133 (169)
the lateral area into two initial condition. init/dam:
parts is taken from the
POO: options: PLOT PLOT .id
(opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO. Start plotting according to macro
Plot according to standard macro. For alternatives, use PLOT .CAT. For explanations of a given macro, use PLOT .id ?. POO Set output options for diagram plotting This command controls the graphic result produces by PLD DLIM, PLD DCRC, PLD DMGM and PLD DMGM. For the parameters of the command, see !EXPL POO/GEN. The subject is DLIM (default), DCRC, DMGM or DPRO. PQ Select quantities for diagram plotting This command controls the quantities to be included in PLD DLIM, PLD DCRC, PLD DMGM and PLD DPRO. PQ subj selection subj: selection: (opt) subject, using the symbols listed above. Default=DLIM. the syntax is the same as in the standard command (see !EXPL PQ/GEN).
13.9 Auxiliary functions - damage criteria

CAT List catalog of stored data The command lists names of stored data of the given type. CAT type type: type of data, one of the alternatives: CRI: CGR: MOM: OPE: OGR: POI: FRB: stability criteria criterion groups heeling moment curves openings opening groups special points freeboard deck edges
134 (169)
BIL: MAR: LOA: INI: DAM: IGR: DGR: CAT CRI DB1 CAT CGR DB1 CAT MOM DB1
bilge curves margin lines loading conditions initial conditions damage cases initial condition groups damage case groups.
List catalog of criteria, criterion groups or moments in the project data base. CAT CRI SYSDB CAT CGR SYSDB CAT MOM SYSDB List catalog of criteria, criterion groups or moments in the system data base. CAT CRI NAPADB CAT CGR NAPADB CAT MOM NAPADB List catalog of criteria, criterion groups or moments in the NAPA data base. DA -> enter damage stability task (DA) The command returns the control back to DA if CR was called from DA, otherwise the program returns to the task level. DES List data in input format The command lists the given data in the input format. DES type name,name,... type: type of data, one of the alternatives: CRI: CGR: MOM: OPE: OGR: POI: stability criterion criterion group heeling moment curve opening opening group special point
135 (169)
FRB: BIL: MAR: name:
freeboard deck edge bilge curve margin line
DES type ALL Display all data found in the data bases. The data base may be specified as with the name (see above). EDI Edit data in input format The command goes to the editor displaying the given data in the input format and the user has opportunity to edit data. EDI type name,name,... type: type of data, one of the alternatives: CRI: CGR: MOM: OPE: OGR: POI: FRB: BIL: MAR: name: stability criterion criterion group heeling moment curve opening opening group special point freeboard deck edge bilge curve margin line
EDI type ALL Display all data found in the data bases. The data base may be specified as with the name (see above). END Finish CR The command finishes CR and returns to the calling level (task level or DA). ENV Change environment
136 (169)
The command changes the working environment from intact stability to damage stability or from damage stability to intact stability. Changing of environment is allowed only if CR is entered from the task level. ENV DAMAGE Change environment from intact stability to damage stability. ENV INTACT Change environment from damage stability to intact stability. OK Finish CR The command finishes CR and returns to the calling level (task level or DA). Synonym of END. SCAN -> enter list scanner (IOF). For more details, see !EXPL SCAN/GEN. SCAN SEND just sends the list to the printer. Note: the current result list will be closed. SRV UNS -> enter services subtask Unsave data The given data items are removed from the data base. UNS type name type: type of data, one of the alternatives: CRI: CGR: MOM: OPE: OGR: POI: FRB: BIL: MAR: name: name of data item. stability criterion criterion group heeling moment curve opening opening group special point freeboard deck edge bilge curve margin line
14 CR Service Functions
The following service functions related to Stability Criteria are available. CR.DES() data in input format
137 (169)
The function gives data description(s) in input format. The result is stored in a string array. Function value: 0, not properly done; >0, reference of the string array. (CR.DES works as the command DES but the output media is different). CR.DES(type,name,name,...,arr,env) type: name: arr: env: type of data. The alternatives are CRI, CGR, MOM, OPE, POI, FRB, BIL and MAR. name of data description. (output) string array containing data in input format. (option) environment I (=intact) or D (=damage). The criteria and criterion groups are different in different environments. Therefore the environment specification is needed for the type CRI and CGR. Default environment: current one in task CR. get value of dynamic variable For making easier to use macros in criterion and moment definitions, the program assigns automaticly a set of variables. The variables are not normal variables but the program keeps own record of them and the values are got by the specific function CR.VALUE(quantity). The variables which are available by CR.VALUE are listed later. Also other variables, for instance assigned by the command ASG, and functions may be used in the macros. @var=CR.VALUE(quantity) Assign variable @var. Depending on the quantity, variable is single number, character string or array. The values of the variables change according to the current case, criterion and GM (in min. GM iteration), i.e. always before calling the macro, all variables are updated. quantity: name of quantity from the underlying list. AZI: RHO: SIGN: Azimuth angle (rad) Density of sea water (t/m3) Sign of the side, +1 = towards positive angles (port side if the orientation is righthanded, starboard side if the orientation is lefthanded), -1 = towards negative angles (port side if the orientation is lefthanded, starboard side if the orientation is righthanded) Displacement (mass) of the ship (t) x-coordinate of the center of mass of the ship (m) y-coordinate of the center of mass of the ship (m) z-coordinate of the center of mass of the ship (m) Draught at the upright (m) Trim at the upright (rad) Equilibrium heeling angle (rad) Draught at the equilibrium heeling angle (m) Trim at the equilibrium heeling angle (rad) KM of the ship (m) Initial uncorrected GM of the ship (m)
CR.VALUE()
DISP: XCG: YCG: ZCG: T0: TR0: HEEL: T: TR: KMT: GM0:
138 (169)
GMRED: MAXGZ: AMAX: AVS: OPIMM: UNOPIMM: OPRES: UNOPRES: FRBIMM: FRBIMME: FRBIMM.3: FRBRES: BILANG: F1: MRGIMM: MRGRES: MGM: LLIM: RLIM: ANG: GZ: MOM: EPHI: TF: TRF: LOAD: INIT: DAM:
GM-reduction due to free surfaces of the ship (m) Maximum GZ of the stability curve (m) Angle where MAXGZ occurs (rad) Angle of vanishing stability (rad) Immersion angle of unprotected and weathertight openings (rad) Immersion angle of unprotected openings (rad) Reserve to immersion of unprotected and weathertight openings (m) Reserve to immersion of unprotected openings (m) Immersion angle of freeboard deck edge (rad) Immersion angle of freeboard deck edge except in day of damage (rad) angle at which the residual freeboard is 0.3m (rad) Reserve to immersion of freeboard deck edge (m) angle at which the bilge comes out of water (rad) Effective mean damage freeboard calculated from from area as defined in IMO A.265, regulation 1 (h). Immersion angle of margin line (rad) Reserve to immersion of margin line (rad) Corrected GM or corrected minimum GM or corrected GM during iteration of the minimum GM (m) Left limit of the range as defined by the command RANGE (if RANGE is missing, the minimum angle of GZ curve) (rad) Right limit of the range as defined by the command RANGE (if RANGE is missing, the maximum angle of GZ curve) (rad) (array) Argument heeling angles of the smooth GZ curve (smooth = as the GZ curve occurs in calculations) (rad) (array) GZ values corresponding to the angles of ANG (m) (array) Moment as a function of heel (t*m). The argument angles from the array ANG. (array) Dynamic stability arm as a function of heel (m*rad). The argument angles from the array ANG. (array) Draught as a function of heel (m). The argument angles from the array ANG. (array) Trim as a function of heel (rad). The argument angles from the array ANG. Name of the loading condition (only in env. INTACT) Name of the initial condition (only in env. DAMAGE) Name of the damage (only in env. DAMAGE)
139 (169)
STAGE: PHASE: CR.COMMAND() run command in CR
Name of the stage (only in env. DAMAGE) Name of the phase (only in env. DAMAGE).
The function enters the task CR, runs the given command (kwown in CR) and returns to the calling level. CR.COMMAND(cr-command) cr-command: any command or set of commands separated by ;
CR.COMMAND('ENTRY') Special meaning: enter CR and stay there waiting for commands. The command END returns back to the calling level. This method runs many CR-commands much more effectively than the commands one by one by the function CR.COMMAND. CR.COMMAND(id,parameters) The function runs one CR-command, identifier and parameters of the command given separately. id: parameters: command identifier string containing parameters and options.
CR.COMMAND(id,arr) As above but the parameters given separately in a string array. id: arr: command identifier string array containing parameters and options. Example: !CAL CR.COMMAND('RCR MAXGZ,MAXHEEL; LIS CRT') !CAL CR.COMMAND('RCR','MAXGZ,'MAXHEEL') !CAL CR.COMMAND('RCR','MAXGZ','MAXHEEL') @par=arr(3) @par(1)='MAXGZ' @par(2)='MAXHEEL' !CAL CR.COMMAND('RCR',ARR) CR.ASSIGN() quantity of result list as variable The function calculates any quantity of any result list and retuns the value(s) as variable. Contents of the variable is the same as in the corresponding column of the specified list. @var=CR.ASSIGN(type,quantity,opt) The contents of column 'quantity' of list 'type' is assigned to @var. The variable will be an array if the corresponding column has more than one item. @ok=CR.ASSIGN(type,quantity,arr,opt) The contents of column 'quantity' of list 'type' is copied to array 'arr'.
140 (169)
type: quantity: arr: opt:
type of list (see the command LIST) name of quantity available in the list (see LQ type ALT for the alternatives) receiving array. options of the corresponding LIST command (if any). Example: @MINGM=CR.ASSIGN('CRT','MINGM')
CR.ARG()
get arguments The function returns the value(s) of an argument or a list of the currently active arguments.
arg=CR.ARG(qnt,env) The returned value 'arg' depends on the type of the argument. It is a single number, a single character string or an array of numbers or strings. The array must not be changed because it points to the argument as stored internally. CR.ARG(qnt,arr,env) The function returns the argument as an array 'arr'. qnt: env: arr: name of argument. See command ARG for the alternatives. environment I (=intact) or D (=damage). receiving array (alt. 2).
CR.ARG('LIST',arr,env) The function returns the list of the currently active arguments. arr: env: list of the arguments, string array environment I (=intact) or D (=damage).
CR.ARG('ARG',arr,env) Synonym of CR.ARG('LIST',arr,env). CR.ARG('SAVE') Save current arguments in the data base. CR.EXTRACT() extract definition of criterion or moment The function extracts definition data from a criterion or moment. This function is purposed to be used with functions CR.GETDEFITEMS, CR.ASGDEFITEM and CR.DEFINE. CR.EXTRACT(dbname,des) dbname: des: data base name of criterion or moment (CRIT(name) for intact criterion; DCRIT(name) for criterion of damage stability; MOMENT(name) for moment) reference number of the receiving description.
get definition items of criterion or moment CR.GETDEFITEMS() The function gets all definition items extracted from a criterion or moment by CR.EXTRACT. CR.GETDEFITEMS(des,ids,values)
141 (169)
des: ids: values:
reference number of description containing extracted data (2nd argument of CR.EXTRACT) receiving array for names of definition items receiving array for values of definition items (string array).
assign definition item CR.ASGDEFITEM() The function changes value of a definition item or assigns a definition item. CR.ASGDEFITEM(des,id,value) des: id: value: CR.DEFINE() reference number of description containing extracted data (2nd argument of CR.EXTRACT) name of definition item as given in the array ids of CR.GETDEFITEMS new value of the definition item as string. define criterion or moment The function (re)defines a croterion or moment as specified by functions CR.EXTRACT, CR.GETDEFITEMS and CR.ASGDEFITEM. CR.DEFINE(des,unit,env) des: unit: env: reference number of description containing extracted data (2nd argument of CR.EXTRACT) (optional) bata base unit 1, 2 or 7. Default 1. (optional) environment 0=intact, 1=damage. Default the same that stored by CR.EXTRACT.
CR.CHECKLIM() check Max.KG and Min.GM values The function checks the maximum KG and minimum GM values. This is done by re-evaluating them by using the previous results as the starting point. When the change in the results is less than the applied GM tolerance the iteration has converged. In CR_D the results are global values for each initial condition. The maximum number of iteration rounds is NITER/20 or at least 10. The applied GM tolerance is defined with ITOL. If the iteration does not converge the largest Max.KG (and corresponding Min.GM) that match the applied criteria are returned. CR.CHECKLIM (inis,dams,mingms,maxkgs,stats,dcrs) inis: dams: mingms: maxkgs: stats: dcrs: (optional) result array for initial conditions, CR_D (optional) result array for damage cases, CR_D result array for minimum GM values result array for maximum KG values result array for statuses result array for determining criteria
CR.TABLEMOMENT() The function interpolates value of moment defined by a table. CR.TABLEMOMENT(tab,t,tr,heel,azi) tab: name of table defining the moment
142 (169)
t: tr: heel: azi:
draught (m) trim (m) angle of heel (deg) azimuth angle (deg).
Get profile with the load elements CR.GETPROFILE() The function adds the deck or container loads from the given loading condition to the given profile curve. Alternatively a set of room names for deck load components can be given. The function does not perform a check for overlapping deck loads and the intersection is done at the centerline. The function returns the reference number of the new curve in the runtime memory. CR.GETPROFILE(pcurve,curve,load) pcurve: curve: load: name of the original profile curve (opt) name of the new curve (opt) loading condition or a string array that contains the names of the deck load components
CR.GETCRITOL() Get iteration tolerance of a criterion The function returns the tolerance which stops iteration of minimum GM for the specified criterion. @tol=CR.GETCRITOL(criterion,gmtol) If the attained value is within the range (req-tol,req+tol), the GM value is accepted as the minimum GM meeting the requirement. criterion: gmtol: name of criterion (opt) alternative tolerance stopping iteration. If the iteration step becomes smaller than gmtol and the requirement is met, iteration stops and the GM value is accepted as the minimum GM meeting the requirement.
15 Dredger Calculations
This chapter describes how to perform stability calculations for dredgers. The instructions concentrate on intact and damage stability calculations according to the Agreement for the Construction and Operation of Dredgers Assigned Reduced Freeboards, also known as DR67. Other conventions are also possible, e.g. calculations according to e.g. Bureau Veritas, N.I. 144 BM.1, Freeboard of Dredgers and Barges Fitted with Bottom Dump Doors. The intact stability calculations are to be performed in the LD task. The system utilizes some features from the DA task but this is done automatically. The damage stability calculations (DR67) follow the routines of Solas Chapter II-1, Part B-1, Regulation 25-1, with a few modifications.
15.1 Geometry
The cargo space intended for dredgings, i.e. the hopper, is defined in the DEF task. Special features, such as hatch definitions and seawater overflows, are included to the room definition. ROOM HOPPER
143 (169)
LIM BH1, BH10, 0, LGTHBH, >HOPBOT, 12.375 SYM FEA, SWOF1, (25.85 4.2 11.4) FEA, HATCH, CURHATCH The strings SWO and HATCH in the names indicate the type of special feature. The room definition in the example above contains a seawater overflow at position (25.85 4.2 11.4) and a hatch definition following the curve CURHATCH. The hatch syntax indicates that the room is open in way of the defined curve. CUR XY CURHATCH; Z 12.375 * <> (26.6,5.6), (67.2,5.6), (67.2,-5.6), (26.6,-5.6), (26.6,5.6)
15.2 Purpose definitions

In dredger calculations the hopper cargo has to be defined as TYPE=PMC (partially moving cargo or sliding cargo). The hatch and seawater overflow definitions in DEF can not be taken into account by the program unless the cargo type is PMC. The shifting law attached to the sliding cargo is to be defined in the ARAT column. This column can contain an explicit value or a formula. The ARAT column is initiated with the COL command in PDEF task, i.e. PAR?>col arat PURP PDES CLASS TYPE RHO RED PERM LFCODE ARAT
--------------------------------------------------------------------HFO Heavy Fuel Oil B L 0.940 2.0 0.95 C-HFO FW DT VOID DO WB MUD MUDS MUDL Fresh Water DRY TANK Void Diesel Oil water ballast B X X B X L V V L L PMC PMC PMC 1.000 2.0 1.025 2.0 1.025 0.0 0.860 2.0 1.025 2.0 1.500 2.0 1.500 2.0 1.500 2.0 0.95 C-FW 0.95 0.95 C-VOID 0.95 C-DO 0.95 C-WB 0.98 BROWN (2-DENS)/0.6 0.98 BROWN 0.98 BROWN 0 1
Hopper Cargo Sl. X Hopper Cargo So. X Hopper Cargo Li. X
Purpose MUD in the example above is to be used for damage stability calculations while MUDS and MUDL are to be used for intact stability calculations. Note that the density specified in the RHO column can be overwritten when loading tanks in LD. The shifting laws are: MUD: MUDS: MUDL: HEELcargo =ARAT*HEELship; ARAT=(2000-DENS)/600 HEELcargo = 0 HEELcargo = HEELship
Where HEEL is the heeling angle and DENS the density of the cargo.
144 (169)
15.3 Intact stability calculations

Loading conditions When loading tanks by using the LOAD command, the density can be explicitly specified with the DENS option. If this option is used, the program searches for the ARAT definition in PDEF task. The seawater overflows defined in the room definition in the DEF task reflect the position of the lower edge of the opening. This state is considered in the calculations by applying SWOSTATE UP in LD. When calculating according to seawater overflows at the cargo/seawater interface level the command SWOSTATE DOWN is to be applied. Note that a seawater overflow can also be defined in DA task as an opening of type UNS (UNSEAWATEROVERFLOW). In this case the calculations should be performed in DA task using initial and damage cases and setting the UNS opening as relevant. Normal output as LIS ST and PLD ST can be used. If more advanced output, such as a list of liquid loads and inflooded water or a floating position drawing, is required the output has to be fetched from the damage stability task by using the command DA.COMMAND(), e.g. LD?>!CAL LD?>!CAL LD?>!CAL LD?>!CAL DA.COMMAND('LIS LIQL HEEL=20') DA.COMMAND('LQ DRES, HEEL, WLIQ, WFL, DISP') DA.COMMAND('LIS DRES HEEL=20') DA.COMMAND('LIS CSTAT')
LD?>SET PROF LD?>!CAL DA.COMMAND('DRW FLO')
15.4 Intact stability criteria

The criteria according to DR67: 6.1.3, 6.1.4 and 6.1.2.2 are defined in the criteria subtask, environment Intact (CR_I). This subtask is entered directly from LD by applying the command CR. 15.4.1 The criteria according to 6.1.3 CRIT, DRAREAS, 'Areas between 0, 15, 30 and EQ' TYPE, MINAREA REQ, SAREA OK The macro SAREA: 10 20 30 40 50 60 @@ macro sarea @am=cr.value('AMAX') @am=am*180/pi @if am<=15 @req=0.07 @if am>=30 @req=0.055 @if and(am>15, am<30) @req=0.055+0.001*(30-am) DRAREA3040, 'Area between 30 and 40' MINAREA 0.03 30, MIN(40, FA) LEVER, 'GZ > 0.2 at 30 degrees or more' MAXGZ 0.2 30, -
CRIT, TYPE, REQ, RANG, OK CRIT, TYPE, REQ, RANG,
145 (169)
OK CRIT, POSMAX, 'GZ max at 15 degrees or more' TYPE, POSMAX REQ, 15 OK CRIT, MINGM, 'Mingm 0.15 m' TYPE, MINGM REQ, 0.15 OK 15.4.2 The weather criterion according to 6.1.4 CRIT, IMOWDR, 'Dredger load line' TYPE, ARATIO1 REQ, 1 RANG, EQ-ROLL, MIN(50, FA) MOM, IMOWINDDR OK CRIT, TYPE, REQ, RANG, MOM, OK IMOWS, 'Summer load line' ARATIO1 1 EQ-ROLL, MIN(50, FA) IMOWINDS
MOM, IMOWINDDR TYPE, IMOWEATHER PARA, P=0.0276 MOM, IMOWINDS TYPE, IMOWEATHER 15.4.3 The criteria according to 6.1.2.2 c CRIT, TYPE, REQ, RANG, OK ASSLEVER, 'GZ > 0.1 betw. EQ and EQ+30' MAXGZ 0.1 EQ, EQ+30
CRIT, ASSRANGE, 'Range >= 30 degrees' TYPE, RANGE REQ, 30 OK CRIT, ASSEQPOS, 'EQ <= 25 degrees' TYPE, MAXHEEL REQ, 25 OK When calculating the loading case according to 6.1.2.2 c, the hopper room is substituted in the arrangement with one room on each side of the centerline. The most convenient way is to define an additional arrangement containing these two hopper spaces with accompanying hatch and seawater overflow definitions. In LD these are loaded to 40% and 100%. The original hopper room should of course be removed from this arrangement. The wind profile curve has to be defined in the DEF task. The argument list of CR_I has to include a reference to this curve.
146 (169)
Possible relevant openings other than seawater overflows are listed in the arguments of CR_I in a normal way. The loading case 'No cargo, open to sea' according to 6.1.2.3 has to be calculated separately by defining the HOPPER space and the bottom doors as open to the sea. This is done by removing the hatch definintion from the hopper room in the DEF task. In LD the OTS command specifies this room as open to the sea, i.e. OTS HOPPER.
15.5 Variable displacement method and permeabilities

As soon as the used purpose is of TYPE=PMC the program automatically performs the calculations in the damage stability subtask. The variable displacement method, VDISP, is always used in these cases when calculating the GZ-curve. Even if the calculations are performed in the damage stability subtask the steel reduction is used instead of the permeability as usually is the case in NAPA damage stability calculations.
15.6 Damage stability calculations (Reg. 25-1 amended and modified by DR67: 6.2.1, 6.2.2 and 6.2.3)
These calculations are done according to the Workshop no 4 from UM 1999 with the following additions: The permeability for the hopper room is set to 0.98 in PDEF.
15.7 The load lines

The loading cases are to be defined in LD: these definitions give the floating position. The initial cases are defined in DA referring to the cases of LD. Instead of the two load lines used in Reg. 25-1, we have one load line for the unloaded hopper and several cases for the dredging load line. It is recommended to prepare several summary tables, one table for each load line, and to use the weight coefficient 1.0. The model table DR67MODEL is available in DB7 as a model for the summary table. The load lines: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. unloaded, 50% stores and fuel, hopper in communication with sea dredging load line, DENS = 1.0 t/m3 dredging load line, DENS = 1.2 t/m3 dredging load line, DENS = 1.4 t/m3 dredging load line, DENS = 1.6 t/m3 dredging load line, DENS = 1.8 t/m3 dredging load line, DENS = 2.0 t/m3 dredging load line, DENS = 2.2 t/m3
DENS is the density of the cargo. Each load line is to be represented by an initial case group consisting of two initial cases, which are identical except for the SWOSTATE. Dam?>INI DLL2.0-UP Init?>LOAD LOAD8UP IND Init?>OK Dam?>DES DLL2.0-UP INIT, DLL2.0-UP ** LOAD,LOAD8UP, IND DISP, 14254 CG, (46.141, 0.011, 6.75)
147 (169)
LW, LIQ, SLC, GMR, SWO, OK
(44.376, -0.255, 7.153) MDO28, VOL=116.28, DENS=0.86, LOAD=DO, HCL=6.97 HOPPER, VOL=5250, DENS=2, LOAD=MUD, ARAT=0, ADIF=0, HCL=12.108 0 UP
Dam?>INI DLL2.0-DOWN Init?>LOAD LOAD8DOWN IND Init?>OK Dam?>DES DLL2.0-DOWN INIT, DLL2.0-DOWN ** LOAD,LOAD8DOWN, IND DISP, 14254 CG, (46.141, 0.011, 6.75) LW, (44.376, -0.255, 7.153) LIQ, MDO28, VOL=116.28, DENS=0.86, LOAD=DO, HCL=6.97 SLC, HOPPER, VOL=5250, DENS=2, LOAD=MUD, ARAT=0, ADIF=0, HCL=12.108 GMR, 0 SWO, DOWN OK Dam?>IGR DLL2.0 IGR?>INI DLL2.0-UP DLL2.0-DOWN IGR?>OK The value for ARAT depends on the density given in LD or PDEF. The summary table for this example load line looks like this.
148 (169)
The SEL CASE command applied after the CAL TAB command will, for each case, pick the initial case giving the lower s-value. The procedure is the same as in A265 calculations, where initial case groups are defined in the summary table. The damages (first the one zone damages) are generated with the GEN DAM command. The unloaded initial condition is calculated using a set of damages, where the hopper room is damaged in each damage (hopper in communication with sea). The damaged hopper room is obtained by defining a copy of the original hopper room but without the hatch definition, i.e. GEN DAM SUBD=name WTC=name PRE=xx STO=name ADD='ROO HOPPER2 PERM=0.98'. Note that as this room is not a part of the arrangement the permeability has to be defined in the GEN DAM command, otherwise the default permeability 1.0 is used. Because of the above mentioned additions to each damage, the compartment limit table has to be edited so that room HOPPER is deleted from the table as this room is added with the ADD option of the GEN DAM command. The dredging load line initial conditions are calculated using a set of damages containing the hopper room, including hatch and seawater overflow definitions, in each damage, i.e. GEN DAM SUBD=name WTC=name PRE=xx STO=name ADD='ROO HOPPER '. The hopper space is open on top (because of the hatch definition in DEF task), which enables regarding of possible spillout etc. In order to indicate a normal damage of the hopper, in those zones where the hopper is located, an additional vertical breach is needed:
Dam?>DES DAM DAMP4.0.0 DAMA DAMP4.0.0 STA 1 ROO HOPPER BREA=(P=0 X1 Z3 X4 Z3 X4 Z2 X3 Z1 X2 Z1 X1 Z2 X1 Z3) ROO XXXX etc. COM 4
149 (169)
EXT X1 X4 OK A new alternative is to use the OFF option of the BREACH command. BREACH=OFF, ignores the hatch(es) and all other breaches and the room is open to sea., e.g., DAM HOPPER STA 2 ROOM HOPPER BREACH=OFF OK
@@ HOPPER open to sea
After having checked the one zone damages the multiple zone damages are generated: GEN DAM SUBD=name WTC=name OZD=name PRE=xx STO=name ADJ=2-4. Because of the above mentioned additions to each damage, it is also here recommended to edit the compartment limit table so that room HOPPER is deleted from the table as this room is added with the ADD option of the GEN DAM command. Before starting with the calculations the openings in addition to the seawater overflows are to be listed as relevant in the arguments. Dam?>ROP OPE1 OPE2 etc. The calculations proceed in parallel with a completely independent set of calculations for each load line. CAL TAB=... SEL CASE... CAL PROB... Each result table containing the index for one initial case is to be listed with the LIS PSUM and LIS PRES commands. The macro LISTDAM.PSUM (DB7) summarizes the results for each calculation round, i.e. lists an A-index for each load line (Au, Al) independently and also combines each dredging load line with the unloaded case (A=0.5*(Au+Al)). The macro makes the result list using the probabilistic result tables as input. The macro is started with the command LIST .PSUM PTAB=name, where name is the name of an information table including the names of the result tables. The macro reads a column named TABLES of the information table. The maximum size of the information table is 10 rows. The probabilistic result tables are expected to be the result of one initial case group and a damage group, which means that each load line has a dedicated summary table. The macro expects the first line of the information table to refer to the unloaded open hopper case. The remaining lines refer to the load lines containing sliding cargo. An example of the information table: TAB NEW name COL TABLES=CT ASG SRESULTAU SAVE
(column formatted as text) SRESULTAL1...
16 Offshore Structures Stability (OSS)

16.1 General
This manual deals with the calculation of stability of offshore structures using the Offshore Structures Stability (OSS) feature of NAPA. This is not a separate subsystem, but a set of extra functions that are available in the Hydrostatics, Loading Conditions, Stability Criteria and Damage Stability subsystems in NAPA. The OSS feature allows the user to do basically 2 things:
s
calculate stability around a heeling axis other than the x axis
150 (169)
calculate the wind moment using a 3D wind model
The following concentrates on the basic methods to perform stability calculations for offshore structures, including the modelling and calculation process. Other aspects related to the analysis are covered in more detail in the relevant manuals, including those systems mentioned above, as well as the Geometry and Ship Model manuals. The intention is not to be a self-contained manual for offshore structure stability calculations, just to explain the special considerations in the calculation of these types of structures. Floating offshore platforms, like semisubmersibles, jackups, SPAR platforms, etc., differ from ships in their stability characteristics due to their geometry. The geometry of such structures often requires studying the stability around more than one heeling axis. In this way the stability of these structures can be considered to be 3 dimensional as opposed to the 2D nature of the stability of ships, for which the GZ curve is evaluated (normally) around just the x-axis. Of course, calculation of stability around an axis other than the x-axis is also applicable in other cases as well, e.g. crane barges lifting loads at the ends, and the methods described herein apply equally as well to these situations. 16.1.1 Reference system parameters The user should consider carefully the required accuracy of the calculations. These are controlled by two control parameters in the Reference System, namely AACC and RACC. These are shown with LIS ALL CC As of NAPA release 2008.1, NAPA is still mostly a single precision system. More accuracy than 7 digits cannot be achieved, so the user should be reasonable when setting values for AACC and RACC. More accuracy will result in more calculation sections, and therefore also a slowdown in calculation time. For non-slender objects and for calculations involving different heeling directions, 2 reference system parameters should be activated. These are:
s
Waterline sections: These are calculation sections in the z direction and are used in LD task instead of normal calculation sections. This insures greater consistency in results when the azimuth direction is varied. Inertia Balancing method: This is a different way of calculating the floating position of the vessel. It has proved to be more reliable and also faster for column stabilised and jackup units than the standard balancing algorithm used in NAPA. If this is set on, then all balancing calculations in NAPA will use this method instead of the old method i.e. in LD, CR, DA, etc.
These 2 parameters are added to the reference system with the following commands: ADD WLS ON ADD BMET INERTIA
16.2 Modelling
The modelling of these structures is done using the normal geometric definition functions in NAPA. Here we give some hints about how the modelling should be done. Stability analysis in NAPA requires that the following geometric objects be defined:
s s s
a room representing the buoyant object(s) i.e. the calculation object a compartment arrangement if loading conditions or damage cases are to be examined a wind model if the wind heeling moment is to be evaluated according to an IMO MODU code type treatment
For both ship shaped and non-ship shaped platforms, the same reference surfaces would be used in the definition of all three objects.
151 (169)
16.2.1 The Calculation Object The calculation object is a model of the platform's watertight volumes, including shell thickness. It is utilized to obtain values for stability and hydrostatic quantities and provides the counteracting forces to the wind heeling forces. See the NAPA Geometry Manual for details of defining surfaces and rooms. The basic principle is that first reference surfaces are created and then the rooms are created based on these reference surfaces. For ship or barged shaped platforms, the normal process of defining the hull surface is followed. If the platform is more "barge-like" with very few rounded edges or surfaces it may be possible to define the buoyant hull more quickly using Special Surfaces, like planes and cylinders. For other types of platforms it is usually convenient to define the buoyant object by building it out of component volumes limited by Special Surfaces. There are two ways to define a room using existing rooms:
s s
create the room using ADD commands to add component rooms create the room using COM command to combine volumes of component rooms
The easiest method is to use COM, but it is not recommended. The reason is that any quantities related to the wall areas of the component rooms will be calculated incorrectly. The COM command only tells NAPA to treat all the rooms together as a single object, but does not actually combine them to get a final single defined object. Each room still has its own calculation sections and these will be used in all calculations involving the final buoyant hull object. In addition shell thickness will not be properly accounted for unless the component rooms are modelled to the external shell surface (i.e. model total volumes, not moulded volumes), which means making two sets of reference surfaces, one for the moulded volumes, and one for the total volumes. The more useful method is to use ADD statements in the room definition. This creates a final hull object from the component rooms and then generates its own calculation sections. There may be problems with generation of calculation sections due to the complex geometry of the final object, but these can usually be avoided by specifying a minimum number of calculation sections or by setting the tolerances related to volume calculations to more exact values (see the next section). In addition, the shell thickness can be handled independently of the component rooms. 16.2.2 Calculation Sections and Shell Thickness Normally no one cares about shell thickness effects at the early stage of a design, nor is it important when evaluating the stability of the platform (unless you are really pushing the limits). However, because the structures often have very "geometric" or "analytical" geometries, it is often possible to calculate the volumes and hydrostatics exactly by hand. This can of course result in discrepancies when comparing to results obtained by general numerical methods, such as the techniques employed in NAPA, which are subject to one or more tolerances. Especially in the final documentation stage of the project, it is important to have exact hydrostatic values if such can be calculated. There are two issues related to this in NAPA:
s s
calculation sections addition of shell thickness to calculation sections
NAPA uses calculation sections for volume calculations. These are sections oriented along the x-axis. In HYD and LD task it is also possible to use waterline sections i.e. calculation sections oriented along the z-axis. This insures consistent results as the heeling direction is changed in the xy plane. It also eliminates unrealistic variations in hydrostatic quantities with draught that may result when using calculation sections oriented along the x-axis. The default number of calculation sections automatically generated by the system is determined by two parameters in the REF task:
s s
AACC - the absolute accuracy in cubic meters RACC - the relative accuracy in percent
Setting these to low values will give more precise calculation results. It will also increase the calculation time.
152 (169)
In addition, the volume will be affected by the shell thickness. All rooms (and any patch surface symmetric with respect to the y axis) having the characters given by the reference system parameter HLID as part of its name will have shell thickness added to the calculation sections. The shell thickness added is given by the reference system parameter SHEL. As the calculation sections are generated as x sections, the shell thickness is added by offfsetting each generated section (i.e. curve) by the given thickness in the section's x-plane. This means for example that the large falt ends of a jackup hull will not include the shell thickness at the ends, as this would be adding thickness in a yz plane. There are two ways to deal with this problem, if it is considered important:
s
generate offset surfaces from the moulded surfaces using GEN function of DEF task and define the calculation object using these offset surfaces use variable plate thickness in the CSE command of the compartment definition
There are other tolerances which will also have an even smaller impact on the calculated volume, namely !GM LTOL and the reference surface parameter GMTO. GMTO controls the accuracy of the polygonisation of a curve and is used in generation of calculation sections (whcih are polygons, not splines). This parameter will typically affect only the last siginifcant digit of any volume calculation. !GM LTOL controls the distance at which a section is generated at the end of a compartment. The default value of 2 mm means that at the end of a compartment the section will be generated 2 mm from the end, in order to get any section at all. This will result also in some small inaccuracy. Whenever considering the tolerances to set, bear in mind that as of release 2007.1, NAPA is still a single precision system. There are only 7 significant digits available in any calculated number in NAPA, with a few exceptions in the hydrodynamics tasks. Trying to obtain more accurate results is impossible. 16.2.3 The Compartment Arrangement A model of the vessel's general arrangement is required for generating loading and damage cases. This is done in the normal way by creating the relevant rooms and spaces and then making a compartment arrangement in the Ship Model task (SM). See the NAPA Ship Model manual for details. One thing to note is that for column stabilised structures the typical use of six limits in a room definition is usually not possible for rooms located in the pontoons and columns. Here, the outer shell surfaces used are usually of closed orientation (e.g. a round cylinder), which means the definitions usually have to make explicit statements to inside and outside using < or > in the limits command. In the Room Editor this is always done anyway, but for people still using command based definitions they should be aware of this. Also it is normal that less than 6 limits are required, and overdefining may cause failures in the generation of calculation sections for the room. 16.2.4 The Wind Model In NAPA there is the possibility to calculate wind-heeling moments based on a wind model. This follows the treatment of the heeling moment due to wind as per the IMO MODU code (1989), which is the same as or at least similar to ABS, DNV, HSE and NMD regulations. The wind model is a three dimensional model of the vessel's windage and underwater structures. In NAPA this is a set of surfaces and surface objects representing the various structures exposed to the wind. This is used to determine the profile for the wind heeling moment. These surfaces are organized in a structural arrangement table (prefix STR*). The user controls the directions of the stability axis and wind and the program automatically calculates the varying profile and the heeling moment due to wind. Both the underwater and windage surface parts should be defined. In this way the center of gravity of the underwater area is determined and all heeling moment levers for the windage surfaces are calculated. It is possible to model these strucrures in NAPA as precisely as desired. It is not recommended to generate a pointlessly accurate model because it may lead to a significant increase in the calculation time with no substantial improvement in the accuracy of the results. All surfaces in the wind model exposed to the wind take part in the overall profile area and heeling moment calculations. The actual floating position at each heeling angle is used to determine the surfaces exposed to the wind and the total projected profile area.
153 (169)
In order to simplify the descriptions of the model, the shape coefficient classification of structures according to the IMO MODU Code can be used. This allows omission of many small details and structures in the model. Of course, this again is a question of whether or not the level of detail maintained in the structural arrangement for the wind model is sufficient for whatever other purposes the user may have, such as steel modeling. 16.2.5 Using general geometric transformations Because of the symmetrical nature of a lot of offshore structures, the modelling process can be accelerated quite a lot by taking advantage of the general geometric transformations in NAPA. See !EXP TRA/GEN to see how to use these in surface and room definitions. Pontoon Definitions using general transformations in surface definitions SUR, HULLF, P THR FRF, STEM, FBF, CLF, TOPF, WLF2, WLF3, FRF7, FRF8, BF1, BF3 SUR, HULL1 COM HULLF(X/40), HULLM, HULLF SUR, HULL COM HULL1(X-3) SUR, S.PONTOONP 'Pontoon on Portside' COM HULL(Y+22), HULL(Y/0,Y+22) SUR, S.PONTOONS 'pontoon on starboard' REF S.PONTOONP
Resulting surfaces
154 (169)
16.3 Creating the Wind Model

16.3.1 Geometric Objects Geometric objects in the wind model can be any of the available NAPA surfaces. The recommended surface type is a surface object defined on a plane or on a simple cylinder. Very small polygonization tolerance and the use of patch surfaces and circular cylinders increase calculation time. The adding of a descriptive text in the definition of a surface is very useful in identifying the object later, as the number of surfaces used can sometimes be quite large.
Examples of surface definitions used in a wind model of the deckhouses of a semi-submersible When using patch surfaces it is recommended that the user convert the patch surface into a facet surface using the GENERATE command in the DEF task. NAPA will automatically convert patch surfaces into facet surfaces for use in the moment calculation, but often a needlessly large number of facets is created, leading to higher calculation times without a significant improvement in the accuracy of the results. Thus the user is advised to control the accuracy of the facet representation of patch surfaces by doing the conversion themselves. The accuracy of the facet representation can be controlled by the TOL option of the GENERATE command. Example: 1. 2. GEN HULLA_FACET FACET HULLA GEN HULLA_FACET2 FACET HULLA TOL=1
Original patch surface; 1) Default tolerance; 2)Tolerance = 1 See the explanation of the GENERATE command in the NAPA Geometry Manual for complete details. The calculation time increases with the number of facets in the surfaces used in the wind model. This is because the projected area considers each facet of every surface when calculating the wind moment. As the surface representations become more and more accurate the calculation time will increase. This can be avoided by using simpler representations of curved surfaces, considering what wind directions are going to be applied and what wind moments are going to be used. Consider the 2 models in the figure below. The one on the left has considerably more facets, which could be almost entirely eliminated without significantly affecting the wind moment calculations. By using planar surface objects or polygonal cylinders, as done in the figure on the right, the number of facets is reduced and the calculation time significantly improved without significantly affecting the results.
155 (169)
Simplifcation of the windage areas Definitions of simplified hull and column surfaces used in the Wind Model on the right of the figure above POI, POI, POI, POI, POI, POI, POI, CYL, AXI, FOR, CLOSE PLA, Z, CYL, AXI, FOR, CLOSE CYL, AXI, FOR, CLOSE SUR, BOX.COLMP 'Column middle PS' COM BOX.COLAP(X+25) CYL, AXI, FOR, CLOSE BOX.SAP 'Strut aft PS' PC3, PC5 <>, (1.55885, 0.9), (0, 1.8), (-1.55885, 0.9), (-1.55885, -0.9), (0, -1.8), (1.55885, -0.9), (1.55885, 0.9) BOX.CSAP 'Column Strut Aft PS' PC3, PC6 <>, (1.55885, 0.9), (0, 1.8), (-1.55885, 0.9), (-1.55885, -0.9), (0, -1.8), (1.55885, -0.9), (1.55885, 0.9) S.MDECK 'Main deck' 38 BOX.CBA 'cross brace aft' PC3, PC4 <>, (1.55885, 0.9), (0, 1.8), (-1.55885, 0.9), (-1.55885, -0.9), (0, -1.8), (1.55885, -0.9), (1.55885, 0.9) PC1, PC2, PC3, PC4, PC5, PC6, PC7, (13, 22, 4) PC1(Z+35) (13, 22, 10.8) PC3(Y-22) PC4(Z+29.2) PC5(X+25, Y+22) PC3(X+2*25, Y-44)
BOX.COLAP 'Aft Column Portside' PC1, PC2 <>, (3.89711, 2.25), (0, 4.5), (-3.89711, 2.25), (-3.89711, -2.25), (0, -4.5), (3.89711, -2.25), (3.89712, 2.25)
156 (169)
PLA, Z, PLA, Y,
ZCL 'Plane through pontoon average height' 4 YCL 'Plane through pontoon CL' 22
CYL, S.COLAP 'Aft Column Portside' AXI, PC1, PC2 FOR, R=4.5 CLOSE SUR, S.COLMP 'Column middle PS' COM S.COLAP(X+25) SUR, S.COLFP 'Column fwd PS' COM S.COLMP(X+25) CYL, AXI, FOR, S.CBA 'cross brace aft' PC3, PC4 R=1.8
SUR, S.CBM 'cross brace mid' COM S.CBA(X+25) SUR, S.CBF 'cross brace fwd' COM S.CBM(X+25) CYL, AXI, FOR, S.DCB1 'Diagonal Cross Brace 1' PC3, PC7 R=1.75
SUR, S.DCB2 REF S.DCB1 CYL, AXI, FOR, S.SAP 'Strut aft PS' PC3, PC5 R=1.8
SUR, S.SMP 'Strut mid PS' COM S.SAP(X+25) SUR, S.SFP 'Strut fwd PS' COM S.SMP(X+25) CYL, AXI, FOR, S.CSAP 'Column Strut Aft PS' PC3, PC6 R=1.8
SUR, S.CSFP 'Column Strut Fwd. pS' COM S.CSAP(X/38) GEN, S.PONTOONPF, FACET, S.PONTOONP, DES='Facet Surface Pontoon PS' HULLF, P
SUR,
157 (169)
THR
FRF, STEM, FBF, CLF, TOPF, WLF2, WLF3, FRF7, FRF8, BF1, BF3
SUR, HULLM, P THR FRA, CLB, FBM, FSML, FSMU, TOPM, CLM, FRF, FRM1 SO CBA1.BOX 'Cross brace aft'; LIM >BOX.COLAP SO CBA.BOX 'Cross brace aft' COM CBA1.BOX, CBA1.BOX(Y/0) SO CSAP.BOX 'Column Brace Aft PS'; IN BOX.CSAP LIM >BOX.COLAP, >BOX.COLMP, Z<S.MDECK SO SAP.BOX 'Strut Aft PS'; IN BOX.SAP LIM >BOX.COLAP, Y>0, Z<S.MDECK SO PONTOONPV.SIM 'Simple wind model pontoon vertical'; YCL LIM <PONTOONP SO PONTOONSV.SIM REF PONTOONPV.SIM SO PONTOONP 'Pontoon Fully Trimmed, PS'; RED <S.COLAP RED <S.COLMP RED <S.COLFP SUR, HULL1 COM HULLF(X/40), HULLM, HULLF SO CBM.BOX 'Cross brace Mid Partially Trimmed' COM CBA.BOX(X+25) SO SAS.BOX 'Strut Aft SB' REF SAP.BOX SO CSFP.BOX 'Column Brace Fwd PS' COM CSAP.BOX(X/38) SO CSFS.BOX 'Column Brace Fwd SB' REF CSFP.BOX SO CSAS.BOX 'Column Brace Aft SB' REF CSAP.BOX SO SMP.BOX 'Strut Mid PS' COM SAP.BOX(X+25) SO CBF.BOX 'Cross brace Fwd' COM CBM.BOX(X+25) SO SFP.BOX 'Strut Fwd PS' IN S.PONTOONPF IN IN BOX.CBA
158 (169)
COM SMP.BOX(X+25) SUR, HULL COM HULL1(X-3) SO SMS.BOX 'Strut Mid SB' REF SMP.BOX SO SFS.BOX 'Strut Fwd SB' REF SFP.BOX SUR, S.PONTOONP 'Pontoon on Portside' COM HULL(Y+22), HULL(Y/0,Y+22) SO COLAP.BOX 'Box Column Aft PS'; LIM >S.PONTOONP, Z<S.MDECK SO COLAS.BOX 'Box column Aft SB' REF COLAP.BOX SO PONTOONPH.SIM 'Simple wind model pontoon horizontal'; IN ZCL LIM <STABHULL, Y>0 SO PONTOONSH.SIM REF PONTOONPH.SIM SO COLMP.BOX 'Box Column Aft PS' COM COLAP.BOX(X+25) SO COLMS.BOX 'Box column Mid SB' REF COLMP.BOX SO COLFP.BOX 'Box Column Aft PS' COM COLMP.BOX(X+25) SO COLFS.BOX 'Box column Fwd SB' REF COLFP.BOX One more thing to take care of is overlapping surfaces. If 2 surfaces are overlapping, then the overlapping area gets counted twice. This is because the regulations do not allow for blockage or sheltering effects from the wind by having structures one in front of the other. However, this does not mean that actual connections between structures and their blocking effects should be disregarded. For example, in the figure below the deck is modelled as a planar surface object, but the area blocked by the connection to the columns is still counted. In order to properly account for the real windage area, the user should reduce the area of the connections in the surface object definition, as shown on the right. Likewise for the upper deck the connections of deck houses should be reduced from the deck area. IN BOX.COLAP
159 (169)
Deck and columns overlapping (left) and double areas removed (right) The necessity of this is rather a question of modelling discretion. At the end of the day, bulk drag coefficients are applied to block areas representing quite complicated 3D structures. The calculation is in any case an approximation, so it is really up to the discretion of the person doing the analysis whether or not these overlapping windage areas are removed. The point here is to make the user aware that they exist. As a general guideline when modelling for the wind model, bear in mind always that the surfaces which are to be modelled should be the actual outside exposed areas of the structures. 16.3.2 Wind Model Tables All the surfaces included in a wind model are collected together by using a table. This can be a normal NAPA table (prefix TAB*) or a structural arrangement table (prefix STR*). It is recommended to save the wind model as a structural arrangement. This allows the user to take advantage of built-in functions related to structural arrangement tables, such as plotting of the arrangement in the Geometry Window. The NAPA Ship Model manual describes in detail the features and creation of a structural arrangement table. Here, only the aspects of the structural arrangement relevant to the wind modeling of the structures are discussed. If the user has NAPA Steel it is of course very beneficial if the same structural arrangement tables were used in both the stability calculations and as the basis for the NAPA Steel hull and deckhouse modeling. However, the wind modeling will not require the same level of detail as the steel model nor will all the structure definitions used in the wind model necessarily be useful in the steel model due to simplifications allowed during the windage surface modeling. The user is advised to consider then what structures can be grouped into structural arrangement tables for use in both the wind model and the steel model when constructing the models. E.g. Hull structures defined as surface objects in the wind model can also be used in the steel model. Normally the wind model should be able to provide the exterior surfaces, surface objects and corresponding structural arrangements for the steel model. The definition of the table columns for wind modeling purposes is as follows: COL, NAME KEY ;** The name of the surfac COL, COEF ;** The shape coefficient of the surface COL, SIDE ;** The windage side of the surface; B, if both side are windage COL, WRCOEF ;** The water resistance shape coefficient, assumed to be the same as COEF if missing. Optional. The columns NAME, COEF and SIDE are necessary for the wind moment calculation and must be included. These columns are explained below: NAME Name of the surface or surface object. When using a structural arrangement table this is automatically included.
160 (169)
COEF
Shape coefficient to be used to correct the wind drag because of simplifying the structure with a single surface or surface object. E.g. The side of a derrick can be simplified using a trapezoidal surface object. Either O, I or B. The windage side of a surface will by default be the side defined as the outside (O). The inside can be specified with I. If both sides are to be used this is specified by a B. Optional column. Shape coefficient to be used to correct the water drag because of simplifying the structure with a single surface or surface object. E.g. The side of a derrick can be simplified using a trapezoidal surface object. If not given, it is assumed to be the same as COEF.
SIDE
WRCOEF
If the table is created as a structural arrangement table then the above column definitions and commands should be given after the table has been created. A new wind model table can be created using a model table stored in the NAPADB (DB7). This is most easily done by opening the Table Editor from the NAPA Main Window Tools Menu, pressing the New Button and then specifying the name of the table, selecting the prefix STR* and the model table as STR*WIND_MODEL.
This makes use of the model structural arrangement table STR*WIND_MODEL stored in the NAPA database (DB7). The column definitions follow the normal structural arrangement definitions supplemented with the columns SIDE and COEF defined above. It is advisable to create several tables in this way, grouping the structures according to some common characteristic e.g. caissons and hulls, deckhouse outer surfaces, etc. The complete wind model can be compiled from the sub-tables using the COMBINE command of the table calculation service.
Defining the wind model in the Table Editor By using a structural arrangement to model the windage and underwater structures many features related to structural arrangement listing and plotting functions are available, including plotting of the arrangements in the Geometry window and the ability to use the arrangement in NAPA Steel.
161 (169)
Wind model structural arrangement in the Geometry Window The use of a normal NAPA table (prefix TAB*) to define the wind model can be done using another model table, for those who do not wish to use the structural arrangement functions. This is done in the normal TAB task as follows: TAB?>new name wind_model TAB?>sav This makes use of the model table TAB*WIND_MODEL stored in the NAPADB (DB7). The columns are NAME, DES, COEF and SIDE. The DES column is taken from the surface definition's descriptive text. The definition of SIDE values for the wind model tables is facilitated by drop down menus and CHECK functions in the DB7 model table definitions. This is done in the normal way by clicking twice on a cell to enter the editing mode and then right clicking once to get the drop down menu. The values available in the drop down menus for SIDE are defined in the CHECK function associated with the model table. The table TAB*IMO_MODU in the NAPADB contains a list of shape coefficients, standard shapes and logical fill codes. This table can be used to colour the structures when drawing according to the shape coefficient. Colouring of the structural arrangement in this way is accomplished with the command: DR?>FILL STR TAB*IMO_MODU STR*name before plotting the arrangement with PLO STR*name.
16.4 Calculation Procedure - Intact Stability

The intact stability of an offshore structure is evaluated in the Stability Criteria subsystem (CR). The environment of the subsystem must be set to INTACT (argument ENV). The most significant arguments related to the calculation are detailed below. 16.4.1 Loading Conditions Loading conditions must be defined for all modes of the vessel's operation e.g. transition, drilling and severe storm conditions. In this stage of the calculation the vessel's lightweight must also be defined. These things are done in the Loading Conditions subsystem (LD) and Lightweight Definition subtask (LGDEF). See the NAPA Loading Conditions manual for details. When a loading case or loading cases are given in the arguments, NAPA reads e.g. draught, trim, KG, etc. information from the loading case description.
162 (169)
16.4.2 Wind Moment Definition The definition of the relevant stability criteria requires first the definition of the wind moment. The wind moment is calculated according to the form given in IMO Code for the Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units, 1989 (1989 MODU Code), Chapter 3, paragraph 3.2.3: MOM=F*Z = Cs*Ch*rho*V2*A*Z where Cs is the shape coefficient given in the wind model table, Ch is the wind speed distribution, rho is the air density (1.222 kg/m3), V is nominal wind velocity (m/s), A is the projected area of surfaces in the table exposed to the wind and Z is the wind lever arm (m). The moment type WINDMODU is used in the definition. The shape coefficient and area exposed to the wind are determined based on the wind model and the actual floating position. No profile is assigned in the moment definition because this will be done in the arguments. Required definition data in the moment definition are as follows: TYPE WINDMODU PARA C=c CH table wher PARA C=c CH c1 h1 c2 h2 ... cn The wind pressure C (t/m2) is assigned using the PARA command and is equal to 0.5rVV/(1000*g) The command CH is used to specify the variation in wind velocity with height above sea level. The variation of the wind velocity at different heights may be handled by multiplying moments of area layers of the ship profile by corresponding coefficient values CH. The user has to know at which height the nominal velocity v0 occurs and define there CH=1. At other heights CH changes as (v/v0)2.
As an alternative to giving the wind velocity coefficients directly the values can be retrieved from a table. The table must have the columns H and COEF which are interpreted as follows: H 0.0 h2 . . . hn COEF c1 c2 . . . cn coefficient c1 between 0 and h2 coefficient c2 between h2 and h3
coefficient cn above hn
Example: MOM, TYPE, PARA, CH, WINDMODU100, 'Severe storm condition' WINDMODU C=0.165 1, 15.3, 1.1, 30.5, 1.2, 46, 1.3, 61, 1.37, 76, 1.43, 91.5, 1.48, 106.5, 1.52, 122, 1.65, 137, 1.6, 152.5, 1.63
In the NAPADB there is a table called TAB*MODU_CH which contains the wind velocity coefficients as defined in the IMO MODU code, Table 3-2. This table can be used in the wind moment definition by using the command CH MODU_CH
163 (169)
16.4.2.1 Wind Moment from Wind Tunnel Tests Very often there are results available from wind tunnel tests which can be used in the definition of wind moments. These can be used as an alternative to calculating the wind moment according to a wind model. These types of moments are described in the Chapter "Moments Independent of Loading Conditions and Damage Cases", sub-section "Polygon", of the Stability Criteria manual. In this case the moment definition is for a specific floating position. This complicates matters because for each draught, trim, heel and wind direction a different moment and hence a different criteria definition has to be applied. However typically the application of the worst moment from any direction is sufficient for the analysis. For those wishing to use a more complete moment definition using wind tunnel test results for different draughts, trims, and azimuth angles, there is since release 2007.1 the possibility to use tables in the wind moment definition. This is 16.4.3 Relevant Criteria The user is advised to make absolutely sure they have defined and are using the correct criteria. The relevant criteria are set with the argument RCR in the normal way. Some MODU relevant criteria are included in the NAPADB. See CAT CGR and CAT CRI in CR_I or CR_D task to see a list of existing criteria 16.4.4 Azimuth angle for stability axis An azimuth angle for the stability axis in the x-y plane is given with the argument AZI in degrees. For conventional ships the azimuth angle is normally zero and the stability axis is the ship's longitudinal axis, i.e. the x-axis. This angle is measured with respect to the x-axis and increases towards the y-axis i.e. negative values indicate an angle between the x and -y axes. Only one angle can be given at a time. 16.4.5 Wind Model The name of the wind model table is given with the argument WMOD as follows: CR_I?>wmod name dir When this is given it will replace the argument PROF in the argument list. The name of the wind model table is given with or without the prefix. When the wind model is given, all wind moments will be calculated for any position of the vessel considering trim, heel, azimuth angle and wind direction. The wind direction may be given with the same command by specifying dir in degrees. The wind direction is measured with respect to the -y axis and increases towards the x-axis i.e. dir=0 along the -y axis, dir=90 along the x-axis. If the wind direction is not given, the default direction will be the wind direction perpendicular to the stability axis, blowing from -y to +y. 16.4.6 Local Loading Conditions As an alternative to using loading conditions defined in LD, local loading conditions can be defined in the usual way in CR_I by specifying draught, trim and center of gravity or ranges thereof. Offshore vessel stability is usually analyzed using the height of the center of gravity (KG). When an azimuth angle is given, KG values are used instead of GM values. KG can be either given as a single value or as a function of draught. Note also that the trim is measured along the stability axis, as determined by the azimuth angle. 16.4.7 Calculation The calculation of intact stability quantities is done whenever any of the standard output functions are used. See the section Calculation Output below.
164 (169)
16.5 Calculation Procedure - Damage Stability

The analysis of the damage stability of a vessel or structure employing a wind model can be done in the Stability Criteria task (CR). The task environment must be set to DAMAGE. The calculations can also be done directly in the Damage Stability task (DAM) after first specifying the wind model to be used in the CR_D task. The most significant factors related to the calculation are detailed below. 16.5.1 Damage Cases Any necessary initial cases and damage definitions are created in the Damage Stability task. This is done in the normal way except the initial case canalso include a definition of the azimuth angle. This is done in the initial case definition with the command Init?>azi a Note that the initial stability of the structure defined with reference to a loading condition from LD will have its stability during the INTACT stage referenced to whatever stability axis is specified in the AZI command in the initial condition definition. Rather than have to define a new initial case for every desired azimuth angle, initial cases for a series of azimuth angle can be created rapidly with the command GEN in the DAM task, as shown below: DAM?>GEN INI NAME=nn DCH=c AZI=(set) GRO=gname The command generates new initial conditions by multiplying the given one and adding to each new initial condition an azimuth angle. Names of the generated initial conditions are formed by the rule <name of parent condition><delimiter character><azimuth angle> NAME=nn DCH=c AZI=(set) GRO=gname Example: GEN INI NAME=I1 DCH=* AZI=((0,90,10)) GRO=AZI.0-90 The command generates the initial conditions I1*0, I1*10,... I1*90 having azimuth 0 deg, 10 deg, ... 90 deg. The initial condition group AZI.0-90 contains the conditions I1*0, I1*10,... I1*90. Stability of an intact platform around various stability axes can also be calculated in the Damage Stability task by using a dummy damage definition in which there are no damaged rooms. name of the parent initial condition (must exist) (optional) delimiter character between the name of the parent condition and azimuth angle. Default none. set of azimuth angles in standard NAPA format (deg). Note the brackets! (optional) generate initial condition group 'gname' containing all generated initial conditions.
16.5.2 Wind Moment Definition The wind moment definition is done in the same way as in the Intact Stability analysis. If the moment has been defined in the intact stability analysis, it is already available for use in damage stability calculations and need not be re-defined. 16.5.3 Relevant Criteria Relevant criteria as specified by the classification authority must be defined. Below follow some possible definition examples for damage stability criteria:
165 (169)
CRIT, TYPE, REQ, RANG, OK CRIT, TYPE, REQ, RANG, MOM, OK
ARATIO1.0 ARATIO2 1 EQZ, MIN(FAUN, -)
GZRATIO2 GZRATIO 2 EQZ, EQZ+15 WINDMODU100
CRIT, MAXH15W TYPE, MAXHEEL REQ, 15 OK CRIT, TYPE, REQ, MOM, OK CRIT, TYPE, REQ, MOM, CRIT, TYPE, REQ, RANG, MOM, OK CRIT, TYPE, REQ, MOM, OK MAXH17W MAXHEEL 17 WINDMODU100
PROGRW MAXHEEL FA WINDMODU100 RANGE7 RANGE 7 EQZ, MIN(FAUN, -) WINDMODU100
RESFLD4 RESFLD UN=4 WINDMODU100
16.5.4 Wind Model The name of the wind model is given using the parameter WMOD as in an intact stability calculation. The wind model used must be set in the CR_D task (enter from the DAM task if calculations are being done in DAM). 16.5.5 Local Initial Conditions The same applies here as in an intact stability calculation with local loading conditions defined in the initial condition.
166 (169)
16.5.6 Calculation The same applies here as in an intact stability calculation if calculations are done in the Stability Criteria task. If the calculation is done directly in the Damage Stability task then the case must be calculated first before listing. The most relevant issue in the calculation is the calculation direction. This is given in the OPT argument of DAM task. By default the calculation is done in a constant direction defined in the initial condition. This is shown as OPT CDIR. There are 3 other options available related to the direction of calculation of the GZ curve:
s
HDIR - calculate in the inclination direction at each stage and phase of the case i.e. in the direction of steepest slope between the waterplane and the base plane WDIR - calculate in the direction having the lowest moment of inertia of the waterplane at each stage and phase of damage VDIR - calculate in the direction, at each heeling angle in the arguments, in the direction having the lowest moment of inertia of the waterplane
Options CDIR, HDIR and WDIR set the azimuth angle as a constant for each stage and phase of damage. HDIR and WDIR are based on the equilibirum floating position at each stage and phase. This direction is held constant for each heeling angle. Option VDIR varies the direction as the heeling angle changes. This means that the GZ curve is not located in a plane, but rather exists as a 3D curve in the heel-azi-gz space. It is recommended to use HDIR if the structure is not ship shaped. However, in some cases this may not be appropriate and then the correct direction must either be defined explicitly in the initial condition, or a range of azimuth angles must be studied. One instance where the HDIR option would not be appropriate is when there is trim and no heel after damage, but openings submerge quickest when heeling around the x-axis.
16.6 Calculation Output

Standard NAPA commands for output are used (LIST,LQ, TOO, PLD, PQ, POO). The available list and plot functions are more or less common for both the Intact and Damage Stability analyses. Several built-in macros in the NAPADB also provide more comprehensive processing of calculation results as described below. The user is advised to check the online explanations of the commands listed below when using the commands as they contain a more detailed explanation of all the options. 16.6.1 Wind Model and Area Exposed to Wind An output table of various quantities related to the wind model and the area exposed to the wind is obtained for intact stability with LIST PROF: LIST PROF FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) NOHEADER tab-opt Here FLP is optional and can be used to obtain the values for any floating position (t=draught, tr=trim, azim=azimuth angle of stability axis). Available output quantities are obtained in the usual way with LQ PRO ALT L: COEF LCOND PA PAA PAAZ PAU PAUZ PAZ PMCG shape coefficient loading condition total profile area (m2) profile area above waterline (m2) ZCG of profile area above waterline (m) profile area under waterline (m2) ZCG of profile area under waterline (m) ZCG of total profile area (m) moment from center of underwater part (m3)
167 (169)
PMTP2 PROF
moment of area above waterline from T/2 (m3) profile curve/surface
One LQ set named WMOD is stored in the NAPADB as an example and can be used with the command: LQ PRO GET WMOD Equivalent commands in the Damage Stability and CR_D tasks are: LQ DPRO LIST DPRO case options where case and options are the same as for any damage stability list output. Quantities available for listing in Damage Stability are: CASE COEF DAM INIT PA PAA PAAZ PAU PAUZ PAZ PHASE PMCG PMTP2 PROF STAGE initial condition/damage case shape coefficient damage case initial condition total profile area profile area above waterline ZCG of profile area above waterline profile area under waterline ZCG of profile area under waterline ZCG of total profile area flooding phase moment from center of underwater part moment of area above waterline from T/2 profile curve flooding stage
Units for the quantities are the same as with intact stability. Below is an example of typical results, shown in the List Window. This was obtained with the following commands: CR_I?>lq pro get wmod CR_I?>lis pro
Example of typical LIS PRO output 16.6.1.1 Detailed Wind Moment A detailed listing of the wind moment on a structure and height coefficient basis can be listed with
168 (169)
LIST WMOM MOM=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,azim) in the CR task. This is only useful with wind models. 16.6.2 Moments and Stability Any list and plot commands with MOM available as a quantity can be used to plot the moment. See Chapter 10 of the Stability Criteria manual for each relevant list or plot quantities group, e.g. LIST GZC MOM=name, LIST GZC CRIT=crit, PLD CRC crit and PLD LDC MOM=name all work (as long as the moment is included in the output quantities with LQ or PQ). Note that when using CRIT=name, the given criterion must contain a reference to the wind moment, which must in turn be of type WINDMODU. When any of these commands are given and the WMOD argument is set in the argument list, then the resultant moment in the output is calculated based on the wind model and the given height coefficients CH in the moment definition. Relevant commands in the Damage Stability (DAM) are LIST DCRT and PLD DCRC.
Example of moment based on wind model plotted with PLD LDC MOM=WINDMODU100 16.6.3 Criteria Check Criteria checks are done as with any criteria using the LIST CRT (LIST DCRT in the damage environment) and PLD CRC (PLD DCRC in the damage environment). See Chapter 10 of the Stability Criteria manual. 16.6.4 Assigning Variables Variables related to the wind model can be obtained by the command ASG PRO in the CR_I task and ASG DPRO in the CR_D task. See Chapter 10.5 of the Stability Criteria manual for details.
17 DNV Verified Criteria

On behalf of (and in corporation with) NAPA Ltd, DNV has prepared the NAPA coding of the most commonly used IMO stability requirements. The report includes a short version text of the criteria, the NAPA coding that may be applied, and a test case. The report can be found here as PDF document.
169 (169)
All the criteria can be found from NAPADB.

Stability Criteria (CR)

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Stability Criteria (CR)

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

16 Offshore Structures Stability (OSS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

165 166 166 166 167 168 168 168

17 DNV Verified Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

The main functions of the subsystem are

2 Scope of the subsystem

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

4 Calculation and output

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

4.2 Damage stability criteria

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

5.1 Stability criterion

5.2 Criterion group

5.3 Heeling moment

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

13. 14. 15. 16.

5.5 Freeboard deck edge

5.6 Bilge line

5.7 Special point

5.8 Margin line

6 Connections to other subsystems

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

definition functions output functions administrative functions.

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

ARATIO1 ARATIO2 RESDYN DYNARM

There are four alternatives to give the requirement:

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1 Stability Criteria (CR)

TYPE MAXGZ; REQ BY GZE 1.67; MOM USWIND; OK;

** h=1.67GZe, i.e. GZe=0.6h